FF210002
Owner’s Manual

BL00005164-204 EN

Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure thatyou have read this manual and understood its contents before using the camera. Keep the manual where it will beread by all who use the product.
For the Latest Information
The latest versions of the manuals are available from:https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/

The website can be accessed not only fromyour computer but also from smartphones
and tablets. It also contains information on
the software license.
For information on firmware updates, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/iiP Chapter Index
Menu List

iv

1 Before You Begin1

2 First Steps

37

3 Basic Photography and Playback55

4 Movie Recording and Playback

63

5 Taking Photographs

71

6 The Shooting Menus

125

7 Playback and the Playback Menu

213

8 Network/USB Setting Menus

241

9 The Setup Menus

243

10 Shortcuts

285

11 Peripherals and Optional Accessories

307

12 Technical Notes

337

iii

Menu List
Camera menu options are listed below.

Menu List

Shooting Menus
Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies.

N See page 125 for details.
Photo Menus

N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still

photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items ineither menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.

H IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
1⁄4
FILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECTCOLOR CHROME FX BLUE
WHITE BALANCEDYNAMIC RANGED RANGE PRIORITY
2⁄4
TONE CURVECOLORSHARPNESSHIGH ISO NR

iv

P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGP126
CLARITY
140
127
LONG EXPOSURE NR
140
128
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER141
129
COLOR SPACE
141
3⁄4
130
PIXEL MAPPING
141
132
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 142
132
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 142
133
142
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
133 4⁄4 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 143
134
138
138
139
139
139
140

Menu List

B MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTINGF IS MODE
F IS MODE BOOSTAUDIO SETTING

P

178
178
178
178
178
179

v

Menu ListP
P A SHOOTING SETTING
G AF/MF SETTING
FOCUS AREA
146
FILTER SETTING
164
FOCUS MODE
146
SPORTS FINDER MODE164
AF MODE
146
165
PRE-SHOT sJ
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS147
SELF-TIMER
166
1⁄3
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 151 1⁄3 SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
167
151
AF POINT DISPLAYyz
SELF-TIMER LAMP
167
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS151
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
168
PRE-AF
152
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING169
EXPOSURE SMOOTHING152
xF AF ILLUMINATORAE
BKT
SETTING170
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 153
FILM
SIMULATION
BKT170
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
155
FOCUS BKT SETTING
170
AF+MF
157
2⁄3
170
MF ASSIST
158 2⁄3 PHOTOMETRYSHUTTER
TYPE
171
FOCUS CHECK
158
FLICKER REDUCTION
172
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 159
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
172
159
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
IS
MODE
173
159
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
ISO173
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
160
3⁄3
173
161 3⁄3 xF COOLING FAN SETTINGxF AF RANGE LIMITER
174
xF
WIRELESSCOMMUNICATIONTOUCH SCREEN MODE
162
P
F FLASH SETTINGFLASH FUNCTION SETTING
175
RED EYE REMOVAL175
TTL-LOCK MODE176
LED LIGHT SETTING
176
COMMANDER SETTING
177
CH SETTING
177

Movie Menus

N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still

photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items ineither menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.

Menu ListPP H IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGB MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
182
197
F FILM SIMULATIONSHOOTING MODE
182
197
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
MOVIE MODE
183
198
F WHITE BALANCEHIGH SPEED REC
184
198
F DYNAMIC RANGE
1⁄3
MEDIA REC SETTING
185 1⁄2 F TONE CURVE
198
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
189
198
F COLORFIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
190
199
F SHARPNESSF-Log/HLG RECORDING
191
199
F HIGH ISO NR
DATA LEVEL SETTING
192
INTERFRAME NR
199
192 2⁄2 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION 200
F PHOTOMETRY
192
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTINGxF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 200
193
F IS MODE
2⁄3
193
F IS MODE BOOST
194
F ISO
ZEBRA SETTING194
ZEBRA LEVEL194
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL 195
TALLY LIGHT
195
196
xF COOLING FAN SETTINGF EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 196
3⁄3
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM
196
SETTING
196
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 196

vi

Menu List

P P AUDIO SETTINGPINTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENTMIC JACK SETTINGMIC LEVEL LIMITER
WIND FILTERLOW CUT FILTER203
HEADPHONES VOLUME
203 XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTINGQ TIME CODE SETTING
203
TIME CODE DISPLAY
204
START TIME SETTING
204
COUNT UP SETTING204
DROP FRAME
204 HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
204
205
206

207
207
208
208
208
208
208
209

201
201
202
202
203

P

210
210
211
211
212

vii

Menu List

G AF/MF SETTINGF FOCUS AREA
F FOCUS MODE
F AF MODE
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
1⁄2 xF AF ILLUMINATOR
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTINGF SUBJECT DETECTION
SETTINGF AF+MF
F MF ASSISTF FOCUS CHECKxF INSTANT AF SETTING
2⁄2 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
xF AF RANGE LIMITERF TOUCH SCREEN MODE
FOCUS CHECK LOCK

Before You Begin

The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.

N See page 219 for details.
Menu List

C PLAY BACK MENUSWITCH SLOTRAW CONVERSIONHEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
1⁄3
SIMULTANEOUS DELETECROPRESIZEPROTECT

viii

P C PLAY BACK MENU
P
219
IMAGE ROTATE
228
220
VOICE MEMO SETTING
229
222
RATING
230
223
COPY
231
2⁄3
225
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE 232
225
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 234
226
SLIDE SHOW
234
227
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST235
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
237
3⁄3 instax PRINTER PRINT238
DISP ASPECT
239

Menu List

Setup Menus
Adjust basic camera settings.

N See page 243 for details.
P D SCREEN SETTINGP

VIEW MODE SETTING254
244
EVF BRIGHTNESS254
245
EVF COLOR254
245
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
255
246
1⁄4
LCD BRIGHTNESS256
247
LCD COLOR
256
247
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
256
247
IMAGE DISP.
257
248
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
257
248
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 258
249
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
258
249
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
259
P 2⁄4
D SOUND SETTINGELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
259
AF BEEP VOL.
250
FRAMING GUIDELINE260
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
250
AUTOROTATE PB
261
OPERATION VOL.
251
FOCUS SCALE UNITS
261
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER251
APERTURE
UNIT
FOR
CINEMA
LENS
261
VOLUME
1⁄2
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING
262
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
251
DISP.
CUSTOM
SETTING
262
SOUND
263
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME 252 3⁄4 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)263
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND 252
LARGE
INDICATORSDISP.
SETTING264
PLAYBACK VOLUME252
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
264
2⁄2 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK253
LOCATION INFO265
SUB MONITOR SETTING265
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR 2664⁄4267
x Q MENU BACKGROUND
267
F Q MENU BACKGROUND

ix

Menu List

D USER SETTINGFORMATb AREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
TIME DIFFERENCE
1⁄2
Qa
x MY MENU SETTINGF MY MENU SETTINGSENSOR CLEANINGBATTERY AGE
2⁄2 RESETREGULATORY

Menu List

D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUF EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUFUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
1⁄3 POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION(Fn) SETTINGSELECTOR BUTTON SETTINGCOMMAND DIAL SETTINGo S.S OPERATIONCOMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
SHUTTER AF
SHUTTER AE
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS
2⁄3
SHOOT WITHOUT CARDLENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING
AE/AF-LOCK MODE
AWB-LOCK MODEa ISO BUTTON SETTING
3⁄3 TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGLOCKP D POWER MANAGEMENTP

AUTO POWER OFFPERFORMANCEEVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

279
279
280
280

269 D SAVE DATA SETTINGFRAME NO.
269
EDIT FILE NAME
270
x CARD SLOT SETTING
270
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
270
SELECT FOLDER
271
COPYRIGHT INFO
271
DEFAULT CAPTION
271
GEOTAGGING
272
272
274
274
275
276
278

P

268
269
269
269

281
282
282
282
283
283
284
284

The Network/USB Settings Menu
Adjust camera network and USB settings. For more information,
visit:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/x

P Table of Contents
Introduction ..........................................................................................................ii
For the Latest Information .......................................................................................... ii
Menu List...............................................................................................................iv
Shooting Menus ..............................................................................................................iv
The Playback Menu......................................................................................................viii
Setup Menus ...................................................................................................................... ix
The Network/USB Settings Menu .......................................................................... x
Supplied Accessories ................................................................................... xxiii
About This Manual........................................................................................ xxiv
Symbols and Conventions ...................................................................................xxiv
Terminology ..................................................................................................................xxiv

1 Before You Begin

1

Parts of the Camera ............................................................................................2
The Serial Number Plate ..............................................................................................6
The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable).....................................................6
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) ...................................................................................7
The Selector.........................................................................................................................7
The WB Button ...................................................................................................................7
The Mode Dial ....................................................................................................................8
The DRIVE Button .............................................................................................................9
The Command Dials.................................................................................................... 10
The Indicator Lamp...................................................................................................... 11
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 12
The Eye Cup...................................................................................................................... 13
Focusing the Viewfinder ........................................................................................... 13
Camera Displays ............................................................................................... 14
The Electronic Viewfinder ........................................................................................ 14
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 16
Choosing a Display Mode........................................................................................ 18
Adjusting Display Brightness ................................................................................. 20
Display Rotation ............................................................................................................. 20
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................... 21
The Dual Display ............................................................................................................ 22xi

Customizing the Standard Display..................................................................... 23
Virtual Horizon ................................................................................................................ 25
The Secondary LCD Monitor .................................................................................. 26
Using the Menus .............................................................................................. 28
The Menus......................................................................................................................... 28
Selecting a Menu Tab ................................................................................................. 30
Touch Screen Mode......................................................................................... 31
Shooting Touch Controls ......................................................................................... 31
Playback Touch Controls........................................................................................... 36

2 First Steps

37

3 Basic Photography and Playback55

4 Movie Recording and Playback

63

Attaching the Strap ......................................................................................... 38
Attaching a Lens ............................................................................................... 39
Inserting the Battery ....................................................................................... 40
Inserting Memory Cards ................................................................................ 42
Using Two Cards ............................................................................................................ 44
Compatible Memory Cards .................................................................................... 45
Charging the Battery ...................................................................................... 46
Turning the Camera On and Off ................................................................. 50
Checking the Battery Level........................................................................... 51
Basic Setup ......................................................................................................... 52
Choosing a Different Language........................................................................... 54
Changing the Time and Date ................................................................................ 54

Taking Photographs (Mode P) ..................................................................... 56
Viewing Pictures ............................................................................................... 59
HDMI Output ................................................................................................................... 60
Deleting Pictures .............................................................................................. 62

Recording Movies ............................................................................................ 64
Recording Movies ......................................................................................................... 64
Adjusting Movie Settings ......................................................................................... 68
Viewing Movies................................................................................................. 69xii

Table of Contents

5 Taking Photographs

71

6 The Shooting Menus

125

P, S, A, and M Modes........................................................................................ 72
Mode P: Program AE ................................................................................................... 72
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE..................................................................................... 74
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ................................................................................ 76
Mode M: Manual Exposure ..................................................................................... 78
FILTER .................................................................................................................................... 82
Custom Modes ............................................................................................................... 83
Autofocus ............................................................................................................ 91
Focus Mode ...................................................................................................................... 92
Autofocus Options (AF Mode) .............................................................................. 94
Focus-Point Selection................................................................................................. 96
Manual Focus...................................................................................................100
Checking Focus ........................................................................................................... 102
Sensitivity..........................................................................................................105
AUTO .................................................................................................................................. 106
Metering ............................................................................................................107
Exposure Compensation .............................................................................108
Focus/Exposure Lock ....................................................................................109
Other Controls ............................................................................................................. 110
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode).........................................................111
Bracketing .........................................................................................................113
W ISO BKT ..................................................................................................................... 114
V WHITE BALANCE BKT ....................................................................................... 114
s Bracketing ............................................................................................................... 115
HDR .....................................................................................................................118
Panoramas ........................................................................................................120
Multiple Exposures ........................................................................................123

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) .....................................126
IMAGE SIZE ..................................................................................................................... 126
IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................................................... 127
RAW RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 128
SELECT JPEG/HEIF...................................................................................................... 129
FILM SIMULATION ...................................................................................................... 130

xiii

MONOCHROMATIC COLOR.................................................................................. 132
GRAIN EFFECT .............................................................................................................. 132
COLOR CHROME EFFECT....................................................................................... 133
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE ..................................................................................... 133
WHITE BALANCE ......................................................................................................... 134
DYNAMIC RANGE ....................................................................................................... 138
D RANGE PRIORITY .................................................................................................... 138
TONE CURVE.................................................................................................................. 139
COLOR ............................................................................................................................... 139
SHARPNESS .................................................................................................................... 139
HIGH ISO NR .................................................................................................................. 140
CLARITY ............................................................................................................................ 140
LONG EXPOSURE NR ................................................................................................ 140
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ....................................................................... 141
COLOR SPACE ............................................................................................................... 141
PIXEL MAPPING ........................................................................................................... 141
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ..................................................................... 142
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING.................................................................... 142
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING ........................................................................ 142
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 143
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................146
FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................. 146
FOCUS MODE ............................................................................................................... 146
AF MODE ......................................................................................................................... 146
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 147
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................. 151
AF POINT DISPLAY yz ...................................................................................... 151
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS................................................................................ 151
PRE-AF ............................................................................................................................... 152
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 152
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................. 153
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 155
AF+MF .............................................................................................................................. 157
MF ASSIST ....................................................................................................................... 158
FOCUS CHECK .............................................................................................................. 158
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA.............................................................. 159

xiv

Table of Contents

xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 159
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 159
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ................................................................................... 160
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 161
TOUCH SCREEN MODE ........................................................................................... 162
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)................................................164
FILTER SETTING ............................................................................................................ 164
SPORTS FINDER MODE ........................................................................................... 164
PRE-SHOT sJ .......................................................................................................... 165
SELF-TIMER ..................................................................................................................... 166
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING.................................................................................... 167
SELF-TIMER LAMP....................................................................................................... 167
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING ................................................................................ 168
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING........................ 169
AE BKT SETTING .......................................................................................................... 170
FILM SIMULATION BKT ............................................................................................ 170
FOCUS BKT SETTING ................................................................................................ 170
PHOTOMETRY ............................................................................................................... 170
SHUTTER TYPE.............................................................................................................. 171
FLICKER REDUCTION ................................................................................................ 172
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING ..................................................................................... 172
IS MODE ........................................................................................................................... 173
ISO ....................................................................................................................................... 173
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 173
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 174
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................175
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................. 175
RED EYE REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 175
TTL-LOCK MODE ......................................................................................................... 176
LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................. 176
COMMANDER SETTING .......................................................................................... 177
CH SETTING ................................................................................................................... 177
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................178
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 178
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 178
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 178

xv

F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 178
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 178
AUDIO SETTING........................................................................................................... 179
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................182
MOVIE SETTING LIST................................................................................................. 182
SHOOTING MODE ...................................................................................................... 182
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 183
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 184
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 185
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING......................................................................................... 189
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION .................................................................. 190
F-Log/HLG RECORDING ......................................................................................... 191
DATA LEVEL SETTING ............................................................................................... 192
F PHOTOMETRY ....................................................................................................... 192
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING.............................................................................. 192
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 193
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 193
F ISO ................................................................................................................................ 194
ZEBRA SETTING ........................................................................................................... 194
ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................. 194
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ................................................................ 195
TALLY LIGHT ................................................................................................................... 195
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 196
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING...................................................................... 196
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................ 196
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING ........................................................................ 196
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 196
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ......................................197
F FILM SIMULATION............................................................................................... 197
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .......................................................................... 197
F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................. 198
F DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................ 198
F TONE CURVE .......................................................................................................... 198
F COLOR........................................................................................................................ 198
F SHARPNESS............................................................................................................. 199
F HIGH ISO NR ........................................................................................................... 199

xvi

Table of Contents

INTERFRAME NR .......................................................................................................... 199
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................. 200
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 200
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................201
F FOCUS AREA .......................................................................................................... 201
F FOCUS MODE ........................................................................................................ 201
F AF MODE .................................................................................................................. 202
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................. 202
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 203
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................... 203
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 203
F AF+MF ....................................................................................................................... 203
F MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................ 204
F FOCUS CHECK ....................................................................................................... 204
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 204
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 204
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 204
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE .................................................................................... 205
FOCUS CHECK LOCK ................................................................................................ 206
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording).........................................................207
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT............................................................... 207
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 207
MIC JACK SETTING..................................................................................................... 208
MIC LEVEL LIMITER .................................................................................................... 208
WIND FILTER .................................................................................................................. 208
LOW CUT FILTER .......................................................................................................... 208
HEADPHONES VOLUME ......................................................................................... 208
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING................................................................................. 209
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)................................................210
TIME CODE DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 210
START TIME SETTING ................................................................................................ 210
COUNT UP SETTING.................................................................................................. 211
DROP FRAME ................................................................................................................ 211
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ................................................................................... 212

xvii

7 Playback and the Playback Menu

213

8 Network/USB Setting Menus

241

9 The Setup Menus

243

The Playback Display ....................................................................................214
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................ 215
Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................217
Playback Zoom ............................................................................................................ 218
Multi-Frame Playback .............................................................................................. 218
The Playback Menu .......................................................................................219
SWITCH SLOT ................................................................................................................ 219
RAW CONVERSION .................................................................................................... 220
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ...................................................................... 222
ERASE ................................................................................................................................. 223
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE......................................................................................... 225
CROP .................................................................................................................................. 225
RESIZE ................................................................................................................................ 226
PROTECT .......................................................................................................................... 227
IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................. 228
VOICE MEMO SETTING............................................................................................ 229
RATING .............................................................................................................................. 230
COPY .................................................................................................................................. 231
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE.............................................................. 232
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 234
SLIDE SHOW .................................................................................................................. 234
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST ................................................................................................ 235
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ............................................................................................... 237
instax PRINTER PRINT ............................................................................................... 238
DISP ASPECT.................................................................................................................. 239

Network/USB Setting Menus .....................................................................242

USER SETTING .................................................................................................244
FORMAT............................................................................................................................ 244
b AREA SETTING..................................................................................................... 245
DATE/TIME ...................................................................................................................... 245
TIME DIFFERENCE....................................................................................................... 246

xviii

Table of Contents

Qa ............................................................................................................... 247
x MY MENU SETTING............................................................................................ 247
F MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 247
SENSOR CLEANING ................................................................................................... 248
BATTERY AGE ................................................................................................................ 248
RESET ................................................................................................................................. 249
REGULATORY................................................................................................................. 249
SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................250
AF BEEP VOL. ................................................................................................................. 250
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ............................................................................................. 250
OPERATION VOL. ......................................................................................................... 251
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ........................................................ 251
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND .......................................................... 251
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ............................................................... 252
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ................................................................. 252
PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................. 252
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK ............................................................................................. 253
SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................254
VIEW MODE SETTING............................................................................................... 254
EVF BRIGHTNESS ......................................................................................................... 254
EVF COLOR ..................................................................................................................... 254
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 255
LCD BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................ 256
LCD COLOR .................................................................................................................... 256
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................... 256
IMAGE DISP. .................................................................................................................... 257
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS .......................................................................................... 257
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ........................................................... 258
NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................. 258
F-Log VIEW ASSIST ..................................................................................................... 259
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING .............................................................................. 259
FRAMING GUIDELINE ............................................................................................... 260
AUTOROTATE PB.......................................................................................................... 261
FOCUS SCALE UNITS ................................................................................................ 261
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS................................................................ 261
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING ......................................................................................... 262

xix

DISP. CUSTOM SETTING .......................................................................................... 262
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ....................................................................... 263
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ...................................................................... 263
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................. 264
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.......................................................................... 264
LOCATION INFO........................................................................................................... 265
SUB MONITOR SETTING ......................................................................................... 265
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR .......................................................... 266
x Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 267
F Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 267
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING................................................................................268
FOCUS LEVER SETTING ........................................................................................... 268
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 269
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 269
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING........................................................................................ 269
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING ........................................ 269
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING .............................................................................. 269
COMMAND DIAL SETTING ................................................................................... 270
o S.S OPERATION .................................................................................................... 270
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.............................................................................. 270
SHUTTER AF................................................................................................................... 271
SHUTTER AE................................................................................................................... 271
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS .......................................................................................... 271
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD......................................................................................... 272
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING ............................................................................ 272
AE/AF-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 274
AWB-LOCK MODE ...................................................................................................... 274
a ISO BUTTON SETTING ...................................................................................... 275
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ...................................................................................... 276
LOCK................................................................................................................................... 278
POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................279
AUTO POWER OFF ..................................................................................................... 279
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................ 279
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING ..................................................................................... 280
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. ....................................................................................... 280

xx

Table of Contents

SAVE DATA SETTING ......................................................................................281
FRAME NO. ..................................................................................................................... 281
EDIT FILE NAME ........................................................................................................... 282
x CARD SLOT SETTING ......................................................................................... 282
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) ........................................................................... 282
SELECT FOLDER........................................................................................................... 283
COPYRIGHT INFO........................................................................................................ 283
DEFAULT CAPTION..................................................................................................... 284
GEOTAGGING ................................................................................................................ 284

10Shortcuts

285

11Peripherals and Optional Accessories

307

Shortcut Options ............................................................................................286
MY MENU ..........................................................................................................287
MY MENU SETTING ................................................................................................... 287
The Quick Menu .............................................................................................289
The Quick Menu Display........................................................................................ 289
Viewing and Changing Settings ....................................................................... 291
Editing the Quick Menu ......................................................................................... 292
Function Controls...........................................................................................295
The Function Buttons .............................................................................................. 295
Touch-Function Gestures ...................................................................................... 301
Lens Function Buttons ............................................................................................ 304

Lenses.................................................................................................................308
Lens Parts ........................................................................................................................ 308
Lens Care ......................................................................................................................... 309
Removing Lens Caps ............................................................................................... 309
Attaching Lens Hoods ............................................................................................ 310
Lenses with Aperture Rings................................................................................. 311
Lenses with No Aperture Rings ......................................................................... 312
Lenses with O.I.S. Switches ................................................................................... 312
Manual Focus Lenses ............................................................................................... 313
Power Zoom Lenses ................................................................................................. 314

xxi

Table of Contents

External Flash Units .......................................................................................315
Flash Settings................................................................................................................ 316
EF-X8 .................................................................................................................................. 317
SYNC TERMINAL .......................................................................................................... 319
SHOE MOUNT FLASH............................................................................................... 320
COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ........................................................................................ 323
Vertical Battery Grips ....................................................................................327
Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip ................................................................. 328
Inserting and Removing Batteries ................................................................... 329
Charging the Batteries ............................................................................................ 331
File Transmitters..............................................................................................332
Attaching the File Transmitter ............................................................................ 333
Inserting and Removing Batteries ................................................................... 333
Charging the Batteries ............................................................................................ 333
Cooling Fans ....................................................................................................334
Attaching a Cooling Fan ........................................................................................ 334
Using the Fan................................................................................................................ 336

12Technical Notes

337

Accessories from Fujifilm.............................................................................338
Software for Use with Your Camera .........................................................341
Smartphone Apps ..................................................................................................... 341
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX..................................... 341
Capture One Express for Fujifilm ...................................................................... 342
Capture One for Fujifilm ........................................................................................ 342
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom) ...... 342
FUJIFILM X Acquire ................................................................................................... 342
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ....................................................................................... 343
For Your Safety ................................................................................................344
Product Care ....................................................................................................355
Cleaning the Image Sensor ........................................................................356
Firmware Updates..........................................................................................357
Checking the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 357
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................358
Warning Messages and Displays ..............................................................365
Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................369
Specifications ..................................................................................................370

xxii

Supplied Accessories
The following are included with the camera:• NP-W235 rechargeable battery

O For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment.
The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; besure to charge the battery before use (P 46).

• AC-5VJ AC power adapter• Plug adapter• USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.)• Body cap (comes attached to camera)• Shoulder strap• Cable protector• Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe)• Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera)• File transmitter/vertical battery grip connector cover(comes attached to camera)• Cooling fan connector cover (comes attached to camera)• Basic Manual
N • The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region.
• For information on compatible computer software, see “Software for
Use with Your Camera” (P 341).

xxiii

About This ManualThis manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X-H2S
digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its
contents before proceeding.
Symbols and Conventions
The following symbols are used in this manual:
O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the
product.
Additional
information that may be helpful when using theNproduct.
P Pages on which related information may be found.
Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations
are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplified,
while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model ofcamera described in this manual.
Terminology
The optional SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Type B CFexpress memory
cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as “memory cards”. The electronic viewfinder may be referred to as the“EVF” and the LCD monitor as the “LCD”. Smartphones and tablets
are referred to as “smartphones”.

xxiv

Before You Begin

1

Parts of the Camera

1
Before You Begin

A ISO button .............................................105, 295 S Lens release button ........................................39
B WB button..................................................7, 295 T Fn2 button .....................................................295
C Fn1 button .....................................................295 U AF-assist illuminator...................................152
Self-timer lamp ............................................166
D Secondary LCD monitor................................26
Tally light ........................................................195
E Microphone ......................................................64
F Hot shoe .........................................................316 V Front command dial............................ 10, 270
G Diopter adjustment control .........................13 W ON/OFF switch .................................................50
H Dial lock release .......................................56, 64 X Shutter button .................................................58
I Mode dial ............................................................8 Y t (movie recording) button............. 64, 295
J Strap eyelet .......................................................38 Z Hot shoe cover ..............................................316
K HDMI connector covera Body cap............................................................39
L Microphone jack coverb HDMI connector (Type A) .............................60
M Headphone jack coverc Microphone jack (⌀3.5mm) ........................67
N Speaker .................................................... 69, 252 d Headphone jack (⌀3.5mm) ......................208
O USB connector covere USB connector (Type-C) ...............................46
P Sync terminal ................................................319 f Hole to screw USB cable
Q Fn3 button .....................................................295 g Hole to screw cable protector
R Lens signal contacts

2

Parts of the Camera

1
Before You Begin

h DRIVE button......................................................9 u Memory card slot cover (detachable)b (delete) button ...........................................62..................................................................... 6, 42i a (playback) button ...................................59 v Battery-chamber cover latch ......................40
j Eye sensor..........................................................19 w Battery-chamber cover .................................40x Selector buttons ................................................7
k Electronic viewﬁnder (EVF)..................................................... 14, 18, 20, 31 y MENU/OK button .............................................28l Eye cup (lockable)...........................................13 z DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 21, 215
x(Bluetooth) button
m VIEW MODE button .........................................18n Secondary monitor backlight button.......27 0 Q (quick menu) button ...............................289
o Focus stick (focus lever)...................7, 97, 268 1 AEL (exposure lock) button ..............110, 295
p AFON button .........................................110, 295 2 Tripod mountq Rear command dial ....................10, 217, 270 3 LCD monitor .......................................12, 16, 18
Touch screen .................................31, 162, 205
r Indicator lamp ....................................... 11, 195
Tally light ........................................................195 4 File transmitter/vertical battery grip
connector cover ........................................328
s Remote release connector cover ................81t Memory card slot cover latch......................423

1
Before You Begin

5 Remote release connector (⌀2.5mm).......81 - Battery chamber .............................................40
6 Memory card slot 2^ Cooling fan connector cover ....................334(for SD memory cards) ...............................42 \ Cooling fan connector ...............................334
7 Serial number plate..........................................6 $ Hole to screw cooling fan..........................334
8 Memory card slot 1% File transmitter/vertical battery grip(for Type B CFexpress cards)......................42

9 Battery latch ....................................................41

4

connector ...................................................328

Parts of the Camera

The Cable Protector
Attach the protector as shown to prevent accidental disconnection.
A Slide the protector over the USB connector cover so that the coverpasses through the slot in the protector.
B Tighten the lock screw.
C Connect the cable and pass it through the protector as shown.

1
Before You Begin

5

The Serial Number Plate
Do not remove the serial number plate,which provides the CMIIT ID, serial number, and other important information.

1

Serial number plate

Before You Begin

The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable)
The memory card slot cover can be removed by lowering the interior latch. Remove the cover for ease of access whena camera rig is attached or in other situations that make it difficult to open or
close the cover.

6Parts of the Camera

The Focus Stick (Focus Lever)
Tilt or press the focus stick to select the focus area. The focus stick can also be used
to navigate the menus.

1

The Selector
Press the selector up (e), right (h),down (f), or left (g) to highlight items.
The up, right, down, and left buttons also
double as function buttons Fn4 throughFn7.
The WB Button
Press the WB button to access white balance settings.

7

Before You Begin

N To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the center of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER
SETTING.

The Mode Dial
To select a shooting mode, rotate the dial until
the icon for the desired mode aligns with theindex.

1
Before You BeginMode

A P (PROGRAM AE)
B S (SHUTTER PRIORITY AE)
A (APERTURE PRIORITY AE)
M (MANUAL)
C C1/C2/C3/C4/C5/C6/C7(CUSTOM 1/2/3/4/5/6/7)
D FILTER (FILTER)
E F (MOVIE)

8

Description
P
Aperture and shutter speed can be
72
adjusted using program shift.
Select for full control over camera
74
settings, including aperture (M and A) 76
and/or shutter speed (M and S).
78
Take pictures using previously-stored83
settings.
Take photos with ﬁlter eﬀects.
82
Record movies.
64

Parts of the Camera

The DRIVE Button
Pressing the DRIVE button displays drivemode menu, where you can choose fromthe following the drive modes.

1
Mode
V WHITE BALANCE BKTBKT Bracketing
h HDR
u Panorama
j Multiple Exposure

Before You BeginMode
B Single frame
J High-speed burst
J High-speed burst (1.25× crop)
O Low-speed burst
W ISO BKT

9The Command Dials
The rear and front command dials are used for the operations
below.
Front command dial

Rear command dial

1
Before You Begin

P
S
A
M

Shooting 1

Choose the desired combination of shutter speed andaperture (program shift).
Choose a shutter speed.
Adjust aperture. 2
Choose a shutter speed.

FILTER Program shift.
Menus
Q MenuPlayback

Select menu tabs or page
through menus.
Select items in the quick
menu.
View other pictures.

Adjust exposure compensation.
Adjust aperture. 2
Adjust exposure compensation.
Highlight menu items.
Adjust settings in the quickmenu.
• Zoom in or out (full-frame
playback).
• Zoom in or out (multi-frame
playback).

1 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
2 Applies if the lens has no aperture ring or if an aperture ring with an “A” position is in the A
position.

N The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.

10Parts of the Camera

The Indicator Lamp
Camera status is shown by the indicator
lamp.

1

Blinks green andorangeGlows orange
Blinks orange
Blinks red

Camera status
Focus locked.
Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken.
• Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for conﬁrmation after being taken with option other than OFF
selected for D SCREEN SETTING > IMAGE DISP. (additional pictures can be taken).
• Camera off: Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tablet. *Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at
this time.
Flash charging; ﬂash will not ﬁre when picture is taken.
Lens or memory error.

* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload.

N • Warnings may also appear in the display.
• The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfinder.
• The B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used tochoose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.

11

Before You Begin

Indicator lamp
Glows green
Blinks green

The LCD Monitor
You can adjust the angle of the LCD monitor when framing shots, but be careful not
to trap your fingers or other objects.

1
Before You BeginO • Do not apply excessive force to the hinge when rotating the LCD
monitor, as this could damage the hinge.
• Be careful that the corners of the monitor do not contact the camera
body, as this could leave marks.

N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:• Touch photography (P 32)• Focus area selection (P 31)• Function selection (P 34)• Movie optimized control oL (P 33)• Playback (P 36)

12

Parts of the Camera

The Eye Cup
To remove the eye cup, hold the buttons
on either side and slide eye cup up.

1

To focus the viewfinder:
A Lift the diopter adjustment control.
B Rotate the control to adjust viewfinder focus.
C Return the control to its original position and lock it in place.

O Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could
cause product malfunction.

13

Before You Begin

Focusing the Viewfinder
If the indicators displayed in the viewfinder are blurred, put youreye to the viewfinder and rotate the diopter adjustment control
until the display is in sharp focus.

Camera Displays
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed
during shooting.

O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Electronic Viewfinder

1

3 4

U V

Before You Begin

W
X
Y

5
2
1
0
z
y

Z

a
b

x

c

w
v
u

d

po
t sr q

14

n m

lkj

i

h

g fe

Camera Displays

1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORSMODE(EVF).
3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.

15

1
Before You Begin

A Crop factor .....................................................190 d Boost mode ...................................................280
B IS mode 2 .........................................................173 e Power supply....................................................48
C Flash (TTL) mode .........................................320 f Histogram .........................................................24
D Flash compensation ...................................320 g Battery level ......................................................51
E Self-timer indicator .....................................166 h Sensitivity .......................................................105
F Continuous mode........................................111 i Exposure compensation ............................108
G Shutter type ...................................................171 j Aperture...............................................73, 76, 78
H AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................157 k Distance indicator 2 .....................................102l Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 78
I Bluetooth ON/OFFJ White balance ..............................................134 m TTL lock ..................................................176, 300
K AWB lock ........................................................274 n AE lock....................................................110, 274
L Film simulation ............................................130 o Metering .........................................................107
M F-Log/HLG recording ..................................191 p Shooting mode ...............................................72
N Dynamic range ............................................138 q Focus mode 2 ....................................................92
O D-range priority ...........................................138 r Focus indicator 2 ..............................................93
P Movie mode ........................................... 64, 183 s Manual focus indicator 2 .................... 92, 100
Q High-speed recording indicator ..............184 t AF lock....................................................110, 274
u Time code.......................................................210
R Recording time available/
elapsed recording time ..............................64 v Microphone input channel..............181, 209
S Card slot options ................................... 44, 282 w Recording level 2 ...........................................207
T Number of available frames 1...................369 x Exposure indicator................................ 78, 108
U Image size ......................................................126 y Virtual horizon.................................................25
V File format......................................................186 z Focus frame ............................................ 96, 109
W Image quality................................................127 0 Image transfer status
X HEIF format ...................................................129 1 Location data download status..............284
Y Date and time..................................52, 54, 245 2 Movie compression .....................................186
Z Touch screen mode .............................. 31, 162 3 Depth-of-ﬁeld preview........................ 77, 102
a Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 196 4 Proxy setting (ProRes only)........................188b Temperature warning ......................... 43, 368 5 Focus check ..........................................103, 158
c Control lock 3 .................................................278

The LCD Monitor
I

J

F G H

K

D E
A BC

1

P Q
L MN

O

R STU

7
6
5
4

V
W

Before You Begin

X
Y

3
2

Z
a

1

b
c
d

0
z
y

e
ts
x w v u

16

rq

p

o

nm l kj ih gf

Camera Displays

1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORSMODE(LCD).
3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls.
4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.

17

1
Before You Begin

A Crop factor .....................................................190 e Touch zoom 3 ....................................................35
B Location data download status..............284 f Temperature warning ......................... 43, 368
C Focus check ..........................................103, 158 g Control lock 4..................................................278
D Depth-of-ﬁeld preview........................ 77, 102 h Battery level ......................................................51
E Proxy setting (ProRes only)........................188 i Power supply....................................................48
F Movie compression .....................................186 j Sensitivity .......................................................105
G Image transfer statusk Histogram .........................................................24
H Bluetooth ON/OFFl Exposure compensation ............................108
I Movie mode ........................................... 64, 183 m Distance indicator 2 .....................................102
J High-speed recording indicator ..............184 n Aperture...............................................73, 76, 78
K Focus frame ............................................ 96, 109 o Time code.......................................................210
L Recording time available/
p Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 78
elapsed recording time ..............................64 q TTL lock ..................................................176, 300
M Date and time..................................52, 54, 245 r AE lock....................................................110, 274
N Card slot options ................................... 44, 282 s Metering .........................................................107
O Number of available frames 1 ...................369 t Shooting mode ...............................................72
P Image size ......................................................126 u Focus mode 2 ....................................................92
Q File format......................................................186 v Focus indicator 2 ..............................................93
R Image quality................................................127 w Manual focus indicator 2 .................... 92, 100
S HEIF format ...................................................129 x AF lock....................................................110, 274
T Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 196 y Microphone input channel..............181, 209
U Touch screen mode 3 ............................ 31, 162 z AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................157
V AWB lock ........................................................274 0 Shutter type ...................................................171
W White balance ..............................................134 1 Recording level 2 ...........................................207
X Film simulation ............................................130 2 Continuous mode........................................111
Y F-Log/HLG recording ..................................191 3 Self-timer indicator .....................................166
Z Dynamic range ............................................138 4 Exposure indicator................................ 78, 108
a D-range priority ...........................................138 5 Flash (TTL) mode .........................................320
b Movie optimized control 3.............................33 6 Flash compensation ...................................320
c Virtual horizon.................................................25 7 IS mode 2 .........................................................173
d Boost mode ...................................................280

Choosing a Display Mode
Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle
through the following display modes.
You can choose separate display modes
for shooting and playback.

1

SHOOTING

Before You Begin

OptionDescription
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns the viewﬁnder
on and the LCD monitor oﬀ ; taking your eye away turns
E EYE SENSOR
the viewﬁnder oﬀ and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY
LCD monitor on, viewﬁnder oﬀ.
EVF ONLY
Viewﬁnder on, LCD monitor oﬀ.
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns the viewﬁnder
on; taking it away turns the viewﬁnder oﬀ. The LCD
EVF ONLY + E
monitor remains oﬀ.
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder during shooting
turns the viewﬁnder on, but the LCD monitor is used for
E EYE SENSOR + LCD the display of images once you remove your eye fromthe viewﬁnder after shooting. The options selected for
IMAGE DISP.
D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP. apply to display
in the LCD monitor.

18

Camera Displays

PLAYBACK
OptionE EYE SENSORLCD ONLYEVF ONLY

Description
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns the viewﬁnder
on and the LCD monitor oﬀ ; taking your eye away turns
the viewﬁnder oﬀ and LCD monitor on.
LCD monitor on, viewﬁnder oﬀ.
Viewﬁnder on, LCD monitor oﬀ.

button then used to switch between the EVF ONLY and LCD ONLY
displays.

The Eye Sensor
The eye sensor may respond to objects otherthan your eye or to light shining directly on thesensor.

Eye sensor

19

Before You Begin

N • Use D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu
to choose a display mode for the EVF and LCD monitor.
• EVF/LCD SWITCH can be assigned to a function button and the1Adjusting Display Brightness
The brightness and saturation of the viewfinder and LCD monitor
can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu.
Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfinder
brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do
the same for the LCD monitor.

1
Before You Begin

Display Rotation
When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATEDISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor automatically rotate to match camera orientation.

20

Camera Displays

The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the displayof indicators in the viewfinder and LCD
monitor.

N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be

selected separately. To choose the EVF display, place your eye to the viewfinder while
using the DISP/BACK button.

1
Before You Begin

Viewﬁnder
Full screenStandard indicators

Dual display(manual focus mode only)

21

LCD Monitor
Standard indicators

1

No indicators

12800

Before You Begin
12800

Dual display(manual focus mode only)

Info display

The Dual Display
The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and asmaller close-up of the focus area.

22

Camera Displays

Customizing the Standard Display
To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:

1 Display standard indicators.

Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators.

2 Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.
3 Choose items.

Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.

• FRAMING GUIDELINE• FOCUS FRAME• AF DISTANCE INDICATOR• MF DISTANCE INDICATOR• HISTOGRAM• LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT• SHOOTING MODE
• APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO• INFORMATION BACKGROUND• Expo. Comp. (Digit)• Expo. Comp. (Scale)• FOCUS MODE
• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLASH• CONTINUOUS MODE

• DUAL IS MODE
• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• WHITE BALANCE• FILM SIMULATION• DYNAMIC RANGE• BOOST MODE
• COOLING FAN SETTING• FRAMES REMAINING• IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY• MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME
• IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER• MIC LEVEL• GUIDANCE MESSAGE• BATTERY LEVEL• FRAMING OUTLINE

4 Press DISP/BACK to save changes.
5 Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to theshooting display.

23

1
Before You Begin

Select D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the
setup menu.

Framing Outline
Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see
against dark backgrounds.
Histograms
Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness isshown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis.

1

Number of pixels

Before You Begin

Shadows

Highlights
Pixel brightness• Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curvethroughout the tone range.

• Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of
the graph.

• Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of
the graph.

To view separate RGB histograms and a display showing areas of the frame that will beoverexposed at current settings superimposedon the view through the lens, press the function button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned(P 269, 295).

A Overexposed areas blink
B RGB histograms

24Camera Displays

Virtual Horizon
Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be chosen using D SCREEN SET-UP > ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING.
Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it ona tripod or the like.
2D
3D

1

Roll

• OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed.
• 2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted
left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level.
The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back.
• 3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or
right and forward or back.

N ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button
and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays.

25

Before You Begin

Pitch

The Secondary LCD Monitor
Among the settings that can be viewed
in the secondary LCD monitor are shutter
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity. Different settings are displayed in still photography and movie modes.

1
Before You Begin

Secondary LCD monitor

Default Settings
By default, the secondary LCD monitor displays the settings listed below.

N The settings displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >SUB MONITOR SETTING.

Still Photography ModeA SHUTTER SPEED
B APERTURE
C EXPO. COMP.
D ISO

26

Default
E FILM SIMULATIONF WHITE BALANCEG IMAGE SIZEH SHOOTING MODE

Camera Displays

Movie Mode

1
Before You Begin

A MOVIE MODE
B REC. TIMEC EXPO. COMP.
D ISO

Default
E FILM SIMULATIONF WHITE BALANCEG CARD SLOT OPTIONSH BATTERY LEVELThe Secondary Monitor Backlight Button
To turn on the secondary LCD monitor backlight when you find the secondary LCD monitor
too dark to read, press the secondary monitor
backlight button. Press the button again to turnthe backlight off.
Background Color
The background color (black or white) for the secondary LCD monitor canbe selected using the D SCREEN SET-UP > SUB MONITOR BACKGROUNDCOLOR option in the D (setup) menu. Note that the background is displayed in white whenever the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on.

27

Using the Menus
To display the menus, press MENU/OK.

1
Before You Begin

The Menus
Different menus are displayed during still photography, movie
recording, and playback.
Still Photography (All Modes Except F)
Pressing MENU/OK during still photography displays the photomenus.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECTEXIT

N In modes C1 through C7, photo menus will be displayed if x STILL

is selected for the chosen bank using either H IMAGE QUALITYSETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the photo menus or
B MOVIE SETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie
menus (P 83).

28

Using the Menus

Movie Recording (F/Movie Mode)
Pressing MENU/OK in movie mode displays the movie menus.
MOVIE SETTING

MOVIE SETTING LIST
SHOOTING MODE
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTINGHDMI OUTPUT SETTINGFIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING

1

N In modes C1 through C7, photo menus will be displayed if F MOVIE

is selected for the chosen bank using either H IMAGE QUALITYSETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the photo menus or
B MOVIE SETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie
menus (P 83).

Playback
Pressing MENU/OK during playback displays the playback menu.
PLAY BACK MENUSWITCH SLOTRAW CONVERSIONHEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSIONERASESIMULTANEOUS DELETECROPRESIZEPROTECT
EXIT

29

Before You Begin

EXIT

Using the Menus

Selecting a Menu Tab
To navigate the menus:

1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus.
1
Before You Begin

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever)

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECT

left to highlight the tab for the current menu.

EXIT

Tab

3 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab containing the desired item.

4 Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu.

N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page throughmenus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items.

30

Touch Screen Mode
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen.

TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGSTOUCH SCREEN SETTINGDOUBLE TAP SETTINGON
TOUCH FUNCTIONOFF
TOUCH ZOOMTOUCH SCREEN SETTINGEVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS

EVF
The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pictures are being framed in the electronic viewfinder (EVF). Use
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF
TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the monitor employed for touch controls.

N • When FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, you can choose the face used
for focus.
• You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferentially focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF
SETTING > SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.

31

1
Before You Begin

Shooting Touch Controls
To enable touch controls, select ON for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN SETTING > x TOUCH SCREENSETTING.

LCD Monitor
The operation performed can be selectedby tapping the touch screen mode indicator in the display. Touch controls can beused for the following operations:

1

Mode

Description

Before You Begin

Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
TOUCH
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your ﬁnger
SHOOTING
on the display.

• If SINGLE AF is selected for focus mode, the camera will foAF

AF OFFcus when you tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at
the current distance until you tap the AF OFF icon.
• If CONTINUOUS AF is selected for focus mode, the camera
will initiate focus when you tap your subject in the display.
The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the
distance to the subject until you tap the AF OFF icon.
• When MANUAL FOCUS is selected for focus mode, you cantap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus.

AREA

Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.

OFF

Touch screen mode oﬀ.

O • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.

• Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 163).
N • To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING >x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
• Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls available during movie recording, see “Movie Recording (F TOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 205)”.

32

Touch Screen Mode

Movie-optimized
mode button• SHUTTER SPEED• APERTURE• EXPOSURE COMPENSATION• ISO• INTERNAL MIC LEVEL• WIND FILTER• HEADPHONES VOLUME• F FILM SIMULATION• F WHITE BALANCE• F IS MODE
ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC • F IS MODE BOOSTLEVEL ADJUSTMENT• F FOCUS MODE

N • Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring.

• When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized mode

button can be used to change shooting settings or disable movie-optimized control.

33

1
Before You Begin

MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING >MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ortapping the movie-optimized mode button in the shooting display optimizes thecommand dials and touch controls formovie recording. This can be used to prevent camera sounds being recorded withmovie footage.

1
Before You Begin

Touch Function
Functions can be assigned to the following flick gestures in much the same way
as function buttons (P 295):• Flick up: T-Fn1• Flick left: T-Fn2• Flick right: T-Fn3• Flick down: T-Fn4

N • In some cases, touch-function flick ges-

INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

tures display a menu; tap to select thedesired option.

SET

CANCEL• Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable
touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.

34

Touch Screen Mode

Touch Zoom
If the lens supports touch zoom, you canzoom in and out by touching the display.
Tap the touch zoom button in the display
to enable touch zoom.

1

ButtonTouch zoom
Zoom in
Zoom out

Before You Begin

Touch zoom is controlled using the buttons in the display.

Description
Enable touch zoom.
Zoom in or out. Touch and hold to zoom in or out at a constant
speed.

Rocker switch

The camera zooms in or out at a speed corresponding to theposition of the rocker switch.

DisableDisable touch zoom.

N The rate at which the camera zooms in and out in response to the

T and W buttons can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING > CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn).

35

Touch Screen Mode

Playback Touch Controls
When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN SETTING > a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls
can be used for the following playback operations:• Swipe: Swipe a finger across the display to
1view other images.

Before You Begin• Pinch-out: Place two fingers on the display
and spread them apart to zoom in.

• Pinch-in: Place two fingers on the display
and slide them together to zoom out.

N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but nofurther.

• Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom inon the focus point.

• Drag: View other areas of the image during
playback zoom.

36

First Steps37

Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
Attach the strap to the two strap eyelets as shown below.

2First StepsO To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured.

38

Attaching a Lens
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
Remove the body cap from the camera
and the rear cap from the lens. Place thelens on mount, keeping the marks on thelens and camera aligned (A), and thenrotate the lens until it clicks into place(B).

2

Removing Lenses
To remove the lens, turn the camera off, thenpress the lens release button (A) and rotate
the lens as shown (B).

O To prevent dust accumulating on the lensor inside the camera, replace the lens caps
and camera body cap when the lens is not
attached.

Lenses and Other Optional Accessories
The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.

O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (exchanging) lenses.
• Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter.
• Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright lightsource. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it tomalfunction.
• Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses.
• See the manual provided with the lens for information on use.

39

First StepsO • When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does
not enter the camera.
• Be careful not to touch the camera’s internal parts.
• Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place.
• Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens.

Inserting the Battery
Insert the battery in the camera as described below.

1 Open the battery-chamber cover.

Slide the battery-chamber coverlatch as shown and open the battery-chamber cover.

O • Do not open the battery-chamber
cover when the camera is on. Failure to observe this precaution could
damage image files or memory
cards.
• Do not use excessive force whenhandling the battery-chamber cover.

2
First Steps

2 Insert the battery as shown.
O • Insert the battery in the orientation

shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the battery upside down orbackwards.
• Confirm that the battery is securely
latched.

40

Inserting the Battery

3 Close the battery-chamber cover.
Close and latch the cover.

O If the cover does not close, check thatthe battery is in the correct orientation. Do not attempt to force the cover shut.

O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environments. Observe caution when removing the battery.

41

2First Steps

Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover.
To remove the battery, press the battery latch
to the side, and slide the battery out of thecamera as shown.

Inserting Memory Cards
Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately).

N The camera is equipped with two memory card slots. Use Slot 1 with
CFexpress cards and Slot 2 with SD, SDHC, or SDXC cards.

1 Open the memory card slot cover.
Unlatch and open the cover.

2
First Steps

O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while thememory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.

2 Insert the memory card.

Holding the card in the orientation
shown, slide it in until it clicks into
place at the back of the slot. Closeand latch the memory card slot cover.

O Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle
or use force.

42

Inserting Memory Cards

Removing Memory Cards
Turn the camera off and open the memory card
slot cover. Eject the card by pressing it in with afinger and then slowly releasing it; the card canthen be removed by hand.

O • Press the center of the card.
• Suddenly removing your finger from the card could cause the card to
fall from the slot. Remove your finger slowly.

touch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it.

43

2
First Steps• If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to theUsing Two Cards
The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two
slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the second slot only when the card in the first slot is full. This can bechanged using D SAVE DATA SET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Option2First Steps

Description
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in
the ﬁrst slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVESEQUENTIAL DATA SET-UP > SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL),(default) recording will start on the card in the second slot andswitch to the ﬁrst slot when the card in the second slot
is full.
BACKUP

Display

Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.

RAW pictures are recorded to the card in the ﬁrst slot
and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. RAW+JPEGSEPARATE This setting takes eﬀect only when FINE + RAW orNORMAL + RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITYSETTING > IMAGE QUALITY.
RAW+HEIF

The card used to store movies can be selected using B MOVIESETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.

44

Inserting Memory Cards

O • Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memo-

ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted fromthe card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
• Memory cards can be locked, making it
impossible to format the card or to record
or delete images. Before inserting a memory card, slide the write-protect switch tothe unlocked position.
• Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach ofchildren. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance
immediately.
• miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory
cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the camera to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove
the card.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels
can cause camera malfunction.
• Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card.
• Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which
pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a computer or other device to edit, delete, or rename image files. Always
use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming files,
copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not theoriginals. Renaming the files on the camera can cause problems
during playback.

45

2First Steps

Compatible Memory Cards• The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, SDXC, and CFexpress
Type B memory cards. Both the UHS-I and UHS-II bus interfaces
are supported.
• CFexpress or UHS-II memory cards are recommended for highspeed burst photography.
• The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording varywith the settings selected (P 68).
• A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fujifilm
website. For details, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.

Charging the Battery
For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment. The camera will not function if the battery is not
charged; be sure to charge the battery before use. Before
charging the battery, turn the camera off.

O • An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera.
• Charging takes about 180 minutes.
2

1 Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter.

First Steps

Attach the plug adapter as shown, making
sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into
place on the AC power adapter terminals.

O • The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu-

sively with the AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
Do not use it with other devices.
• The shape of the plug adapter varies withthe country of sale.

2 Charge the battery.

Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using
the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into
an indoor power outlet.

O • Connect the cable to the camera’s USB connector (Type-C).
• Be sure the connectors are fully inserted.
46

Charging the Battery

Charge Status
The indicator lamp shows battery charge status
as follows:
Indicator lamp
Battery status
On
Battery charging
Oﬀ
Charging complete
BlinksCharging error

2First Steps47

O • The supplied AC power adapter is compatible with power supplies of
100 to 240 V (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use).
• Do not use the AC power adapter or USB cable with other devices, as
this could cause malfunction.

• Do not affix labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe

this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery fromthe camera.
• Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat.
• Read the cautions in “The Battery and Power Supply”.
• Use only genuine Fujifilm rechargeable batteries designated for use
in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in product malfunction.
• Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel
the outer casing.
• The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge thebattery one or two days before use.
• If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its
charging life and must be replaced.
• Unplug the AC power adapter from the power outlet when it is not
in use.
• If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may findthat its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge
the battery regularly.
• Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure
to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging.
• Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures.
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth
ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu increases the drain on
the battery.

2First StepsN • If the camera is turned on during charging,charging will end and the USB connection
will instead be used to power the camera.
The battery level will begin to gradually
decline.
• The camera will display a “power supply” icon when powered via USB.

48

Charging the Battery

Charging via Computer
The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with computers with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface.

2
First Steps

Leave the computer on during charging.
Thebattery
will not charge while the camera is on.
O•• Connect the supplied USB cable.
• Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub
or keyboard.
• Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume
charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect theUSB cable.
• Charging may not be supported depending on the model of computer, computer settings, and the computer’s current state.
• The battery takes about 600 minutes to charge with a charging inputof 5 V/500 mA.

49

Turning the Camera On and Off
Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off.
Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera
on, or to OFF to turn the camera off.

2

O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfinder can affect pic-

First Stepstures or the view through the viewfinder. Keep the lens and viewfinderclean.

N • Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
• The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed

for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT >AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off
automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF
switch to OFF and then back to ON.

50

Checking the Battery Level
After turning the camera on, check the battery level in thedisplay.
Battery level is shown as follows:2
Description
Battery partially discharged.
Battery about 80% full.
Battery about 60% full.
Battery about 40% full.
Battery about 20% full.

First Steps

Indicator
e
f
g
h
i
i
(red)
j
(blinks red)Low battery. Charge as soon as possible.
Battery exhausted. Turn camera oﬀ and recharge battery.

51

Basic Setup
When you turn the camera on for the first time, you canchoose a language and set the camera clock. Follow thesteps below when turning the camera on for the first time.

1 Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.

2First Steps

2 Choose a language.
Highlight a language and press
MENU/OK.

3 Choose a time zone.
When prompted, choose a time zone
and turn daylight savings time on
or off using the focus stick (focus lever), then highlight SET and press
MENU/OK.

AREA SETTINGBERLIN/PARIS

AREA SETTING

GMT ±0:00

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
SET

OFF
NO

N To skip this step, press DISP/BACK.

52

Basic Setup

4 Set the clock.
DATE/TIME

GMT +1:00 BERLIN/PARIS

2022 . 12 . 31 12 00 AM 12h

SET

NO

5 View information on the smartphone app.

• The camera will display a QR code

IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERREDTO THE SMARTPHONE.

First Steps

you can scan with your smartphone
to open a website where you candownload the smartphone app.
• Press MENU/OK to exit to the shooting display.

2

APPLICATIONSCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP.

SETN Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera
or control the camera remotely.

6 Format the memory card (P 244).

O Format memory cards before first use, and be sure to reformat all
memory cards after using them in a computer or other device.

N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will

be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when thecamera is turned on.

53

Basic Setup

Choosing a Different Language
To change the language:

1 Display language options.

Select D USER SETTING > Qa.

2 Choose a language.

Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.

2

Changing the Time and Date
To set the camera clock:First Steps

1 Display DATE/TIME options.

Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME.

2 Set the clock.

Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight theyear, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down tochange. Press MENU/OK to set the clock.

54

Basic Photography andPlayback

55

Taking Photographs (Mode P)
This section describes how to take pictures using program
AE (mode P). See pages 72–81 for information on S, A,
and M modes.

1 Rotate the mode dial to P.

3

O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to

Basic Photography and Playback

release the dial.

2 Confirm that P appears in the display.

56

Taking Photographs (Mode P)

3 Ready the camera.

• Hold the camera steady with both

hands and brace your elbows
against your sides. Shaking or unsteady hands can blur your shots.

• To prevent pictures that are out offocus or too dark (underexposed),
keep your fingers and other objects
away from the lens and AF-assist
illuminator.

3
Basic Photography and Playback

4 Frame the picture.

Lenses with Zoom Rings
Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in
the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom
out, right to zoom in.
A

57

Taking Photographs (Mode P)

5 Focus.

Press the shutter button halfway to
set focus and exposure.

Focus indicator
Focus frame• If the camera is able to focus, the focus frame and focus indicator
will glow green.
• If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, swill be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white.

3
Basic Photography and Playback

N • If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light toassist the focus operation.
• Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button ispressed halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while thebutton is kept in this position (AF/AE lock).
• The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macroand standard focus ranges for the lens.

6 Shoot.

Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down
to take the picture.

58

Viewing Pictures
Pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
To view pictures full frame, press a.
100-0001

N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (“gift image”)

icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playbackzoom may not be available.

Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button
to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAYBACK MENU > SWITCH SLOT option.

59

3
Basic Photography and Playback

Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (focus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Pressthe focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order
recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus
stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame.

HDMI Output
Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI
devices.
Connecting to HDMI Devices
Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using athird-party HDMI cable.

1 Turn the camera off.
2 Connect the cable as shown below.
3
Basic Photography and Playback

Insert into
HDMI connector

Insert into HDMI
connector (Type A)

3 Configure the device for HDMI input as described in the documentation supplied with the device.

4 Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will

be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns off
in playback mode (P 61).

O • Making sure the connectors are fully inserted.
• Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5 m (4.9 ft.) long.

60

Taking Photographs (Mode P)

Shooting
Display live view or movie footage on a TV or save it to an external recorder that supports HDMI input.
Playback
To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera monitor turns off and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI
device. Note that the camera volume controls have no effect onsounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls toadjust the volume.

N Some televisions may briefly display a black screen when movie playback begins.

3
Basic Photography and Playback

61Deleting Pictures
Use the b button to delete pictures.

O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures orcopy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.

1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button andselect FRAME.

ERASE

FRAME
SELECTED FRAMESALL FRAMES

3
Basic Photography and Playback

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll throughpictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a confirmation dialog is
not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures.

N • Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any
pictures you wish to delete (P 227).
• Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACKMENU > ERASE option (P 223).

62

Movie Recording andPlayback

63

Recording Movies
Record movies with sound.
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded by pressing the t (movie recording)button or rotating the mode dial to F (movie).
The t (Movie Recording) Button
Use the t (movie recording) button to quickly and easily record
movies while in still photography mode.

N The camera automatically selects CONTINUOUS AF for focus mode.
4

1 Press t to start recording.

Movie Recording and Playback• A recording indicator (V) is dis-played while recording is in progress.
• The time remaining is shown by acountdown display, while anotherdisplay counts up to show the reRecording timecording time.
Time remaining

2 Press t again to end recording.

Recording ends automatically when the maximum length isreached or the memory card is full.

64

Recording Movies

F (Movie) Mode
For more control over camera settings, rotate the mode dial to
F (movie) and record movies using the shutter button.

1 Rotate the mode dial to F (movie).

O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release torelease the dial.

2 Press the shutter button to start recording.

4

played while recording is in progress.
• The time remaining is shown by acountdown display, while anotherdisplay counts up to show the reRecording timecording time.
Time remaining

3 Press the shutter button again to end recording.

Recording ends automatically when the maximum length isreached or the memory card is full.

65

Movie Recording and Playback• A recording indicator (V) is dis-O • Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external
microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
• Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds
made by the camera during recording.

• Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very
bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

N • The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIESETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp—
indicator or AF-assist—that lights during movie recording andwhether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you
can change exposure compensation by up to ±2 EV and adjust zoom
using the zoom ring on the lens (if available).
• While recording is in progress, you can:- Adjust sensitivity- Refocus using any of the following methods:• Press the shutter button halfway• Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned• Use touch screen controls- Display a histogram or artificial horizon by pressing the button towhich HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been assigned• Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases
settings may not apply during recording.
• To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF
SETTING > FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) andrear command dial (P 96).

4
Movie Recording and Playback

66Recording Movies

Temperature Warnings
The camera automatically turns off to protect itself when its temperature or
the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed,
image noise may increase. Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before
turning it on again.
Using an External Microphone
Sound can be recorded with external microphones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm indiameter; microphones that require plug-in
power cannot be used. See the microphone
manual for details.
XLR Microphone Adapters
The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone
adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website.
https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website

4
Movie Recording and Playback

67

Recording Movies

4
Movie Recording and Playback

Adjusting Movie Settings
Movie settings can be adjusted from the movie menus or using
the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus (P 28).
• Use the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus to quickly adjust settings when recording movies via the t (movie recording) button (P 178).
• The movie menus contain options for use when recording movies via the shutter button in F (movie) mode (P 182).
• Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted using MOVIE MODE.
• Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the file
type, bit rate, and the destination card slot.
• Focus mode is selected using G AF/MF SETTING > F FOCUS
MODE in the movie menus. Regardless of the option selected,
the camera will automatically switch to CONTINUOUS AF when
FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is chosen
for G AF/MF SETTING > g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
or SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. Note, however, that choosing MANUAL FOCUS when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected disables face and subject detection.
made using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus
O • Changes
also apply to the movie menus. Changes made in one set of menus automatically apply in the other.

• The type of memory card supported varies with the option select for
B MOVIE SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.

- Record ProRes movies to CFexpress cards.
- Movies with a bit rate of 720 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards
or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V90 or better.

- Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards
or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V60 or better.

- Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress
cards or to cards with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better.

Depth of Field
Choose low f-numbers to soften background details. Aperture can be adjusted when A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual) is selected for B MOVIESETTING > SHOOTING MODE.

68Viewing Movies
View movies on the camera.
In full-frame playback, movies are identified by a W icon. Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to start movie playback.
PLAY

AUDIO SET.

The following operations can be performed while a movie is displayed:

4

Pause playback

Left/right

Adjust speed

View other pictures

Playback inprogress ((xx)

Playback
paused (y(y)

End playback
Start/resume playback
Single frame rewind/advance

Progress is shown in the display during
playback.

29m59sO Do not cover the speaker during playback.
STOP

PAUSE

N • Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press thefocus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press MENU/OK
again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND
SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.
• To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the camera monitor, press the a button (P 60).

69

Movie Recording and Playback

Focus stick(focus lever) Full-frame playback
View photoUpinformation
Down
Start playback

Viewing Movies

Playback Speed
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right toadjust playback speed during playback. Speedis shown by the number of arrows (M or N).

Arrows4
Movie Recording and Playback

70

29m59sTaking Photographs

71

P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control
over shutter speed and aperture.
Mode P: Program AE
Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can beselected with program shift.
Rotate the mode dial to P.

5

P will appear in the display.

Taking Photographs

O • If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed and aperture displays will show “– – –”.
• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial.

72

P, S, A, and M Modes

Program ShiftIf desired, you can rotate the front commanddial to select other combinations of shutter
speed and aperture without altering exposure(program shift).

Aperture
Shutter speed

O Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:• When TTL is selected for F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING• When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING >DYNAMIC RANGE• In movie mode

N To cancel program shift, turn the camera off.

5
Taking Photographs73Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE
Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for
optimal exposure.

1 Rotate the mode dial to S.

S will appear in the display.

5
Taking Photographs

2 Rotate the front command dial tochoose a shutter speed.

N The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter
speed, aperture will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aperture display will show “– – –”.

• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial.

74

P, S, A, and M ModesN • Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be
displayed while the exposure is in progress.

• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for

H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
• The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a longtime-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended.

5
Taking Photographs

75Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE
Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for
optimal exposure.

1 Rotate the mode dial to A.

A will appear in the display.

5
Taking Photographs

2 Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.
N • If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperturering is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating thefront command dial.
• The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture,
shutter speed will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed display will show “– – –”.

• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial.

N Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressedhalfway.

76

P, S, A, and M Modes

Previewing Depth of Field
When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned
to a function button, pressing the button displays a L icon and stops aperture down to theselected setting, allowing depth of field to bepreviewed in the display.

5
Taking Photographs

77Mode M: Manual Exposure
In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative expression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached.

1 Rotate the mode dial to M.

M will appear in the display.

5
Taking Photographs

78

P, S, A, and M Modes

2 Rotate the front command dial tochoose a shutter speed and the lens
aperture ring to choose an aperture.

N • The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicatorthat shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at current settings.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperturering is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating therear command dial.
• The roles played by the front and rear command dials can bechanged using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIALSETTING.

O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
the dial.

1 Set shutter speed to BULB.

79

Taking Photographs

BULB
Select a shutter speed of BULB for long time-exposures in which
you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure.

5

2 Press the shutter button all the way down.

• The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the
shutter button is pressed.

• The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure
started.

• Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending theexposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display
the processing time remaining.

O Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL
IMAGE or when the electronic shutter is selected for A SHOOTINGSETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.

N • Selecting an aperture of A fixes shutter speed at 30 s.
• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for

H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.

5
Taking Photographs

80

P, S, A, and M Modes

Using a Remote Release
A remote release can be used for long time-exposures. When using an optional RR-100 remoterelease or an electronic release from third-party
suppliers, connect it to the camera’s remote release connector.
Exposure Preview
To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for
D SCREEN SET-UP > PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE.

N Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the flash

81

5
Taking Photographs

or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the picture is taken.

FILTER
Take photos with filter effects.

1 Rotate the mode dial to FILTER.

2 Choose a filter via A SHOOTING SETTING > FILTER SETTING.
Filter
G TOY CAMERAH MINIATURE
I POP COLOR

5Taking Photographs

J HIGH-KEY
Z LOW-KEYK DYNAMIC TONEX SOFT FOCUS

Description
Choose for a retro toy camera eﬀect.
The tops and bottoms of pictures are blurred fora diorama eﬀect.
Create high-contrast images with saturated
colors.
Create bright, low-contrast images.
Create uniformly dark tones with few areas ofemphasized highlights.
Dynamic tone expression is used for a fantasy
eﬀect.
Create a look that is evenly soft throughout thewhole image.

u PARTIAL COLOR (RED)v PARTIAL COLOR (ORANGE)
Areas of the image that are the selected color
w PARTIAL COLOR (YELLOW)
are recorded in that color. All other areas of thex PARTIAL COLOR (GREEN)
image are recorded in black-and-white.
y PARTIAL COLOR (BLUE)z PARTIAL COLOR (PURPLE)O Depending on the subject and camera settings, images may insome cases be grainy or vary in brightness or hue.

82

P, S, A, and M Modes

Custom Modes
Rotate the mode dial to any of modes
C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C7 (CUSTOM 7)
to take pictures using previously-saved
shooting menu settings.

Mode Selection: Still Photography or Movie
Choose whether the selected custom settings bank (C1 throughC7) is for still photography (x STILL) or movie recording(F MOVIE).

1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus,
highlight xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING, and press MENU/OK.

N You can also use B MOVIE SETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE
SETTING in the movie menus.

5

3 Highlight x STILL or F MOVIE andxF CUSTOM MODE SETTING

Taking Photographs

2 Highlight the desired custom set-xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING

tings bank and press MENU/OK.

press MENU/OK.
The selected custom settings bankcan now be used for still photography or movie recording.

x STILLF MOVIE

83

Saving Current Settings
Save current settings in a custom settings bank.

1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photomenus, highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, andpress MENU/OK.

N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIESETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING.

2 Highlight a destination bank for current settings (C1 through C7) andpress MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7

ASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNED
EXIT

5

3 Highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
and press MENU/OK.

Taking Photographs

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

Current settings will be saved to theselected bank.

CUSTOM 1
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGESCOPYRESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

SAVE CURRENT SETTINGSCUSTOM 1
SAVE THE CHANGES OK?

OK
CANCEL84

P, S, A, and M Modes

Editing Custom Settings
Edit existing custom settings banks.

1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photomenus, highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, andpress MENU/OK.

N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIESETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7

ASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNED
EXIT

3 Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press
MENU/OK.

ing menu items; highlight an item
you wish to edit and press MENU/OK.
Adjust the selected item as desired.

5
Taking Photographs

4 The camera will display a list of shoot-

CUSTOM 1
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGESCOPYRESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAMECUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECKSHOOTING MODE
SHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
EXP. COMPENSATION
DRIVE MODE

EXIT

85

5 Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting
menu list.
Adjust additional items as desired.

N If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > AUTO

UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the photo menu or for B MOVIESETTING > FAUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the movie menu, red dots will appear next to the edited items but thechanges will not be saved automatically.
• To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in thelist and press Q.
• To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVETHE CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous
settings, select RESET THE CHANGES.
• If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copiedwith the changes intact.

5
Taking Photographs

86

P, S, A, and M Modes

Copying Custom Settings
Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting thesettings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been renamed, the name will also be copied to the destination bank.

1 Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus,

highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and press MENU/OK.

N To copy settings for a movie custom settings bank, navigate to
B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.

2 Highlight the source bank and press
MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7

ASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNED
EXIT

3 Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK.

CUSTOM 1

5
Taking Photographs

SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGESCOPYRESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

87

4 Highlight the destination bank (C1through C7) and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

COPY TOCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7

N Any changes to custom settings in thedestination bank will be overwritten.

5 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

The selected settings will be copied
to the destination bank, overwriting
any existing settings.

5
Taking Photographs

88

COPY
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
COPY OK?

OKCANCELP, S, A, and M Modes

Resetting Custom Settings
Reset selected custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

N This assumes that you wish to reset settings for still photography.

To reset movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in themovie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7

ASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNED
EXIT

3 Highlight RESET CUSTOM SETTING
and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

The selected bank will be reset.

5
Taking Photographs

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

CUSTOM 1
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGESCOPYRESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAMERESET CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
RESET CUSTOM SETTING OK?
RESET ALL SETTINGS TO DEFAULTOK
CANCEL89

P, S, A, and M Modes

Renaming Custom Settings Banks
Rename selected custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

N This assumes that you wish to rename settings for still photography. To rename movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in
the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7

ASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNEDASSIGNED
EXIT

3 Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME andpress MENU/OK.

5

CUSTOM 1

Taking Photographs

SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGESCOPYRESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

4 Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and selectSET.
The selected bank will be renamed.

90

Autofocus
Take pictures using autofocus.

1 Select single or continuous AF for G AF/MF SETTING >FOCUS MODE in the shooting menu (P 92).

2 Use G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE to choose an AF mode
(P 94).
3 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS
AREA and choose the position andsize of the focus frame (P 96).

4 Take pictures.
5
Taking Photographs

91

Focus Mode
Choose how the camera focuses.

1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus.
2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS MODE in the shooting
menu.

3 Choose from the following options:Mode

Description
Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manp
ual control of focus or in situations in which the camera is
MANUAL FOCUS unable to focus using autofocus (P 100).
Focus is continually adjusted to reﬂect changes in the disk
tance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed
CONTINUOUS AF halfway. Use for subjects that are in motion.

l

5

SINGLE AF

Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Choose for stationary subjects.

Taking Photographs

N • Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.
• If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF, focus will be ad-justed continuously in modes l and k even when the shutter button is not pressed.

92

Autofocus

The Focus Indicator
Focus status is shown by the focus indicator.

Focus indicator

Focus indicator( )z(lights green)(z)(lights green)A(blinks white)j

Focus status
Camera focusing.
Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode l).
Subject in focus (focus mode k). Focus is automatically adjusted for changes in distance to subject.
Camera unable to focus.
Manual focus (focus mode p).

5
Taking Photographs

93Autofocus Options (AF Mode)
Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the
combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes.

1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE.
3 Choose an AF mode.
How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode.
Focus Mode l (SINGLE AF)
OptionDescription

Sample image

Camera focuses on subject inselected focus point. Use for pinSINGLE POINT point focus on selected subject.

r

5Taking Photographs

y
ZONE

z
WIDE

j
ALL

94

Camera focuses on subject in selected focus zone. Focus zones include multiple focus points, making it easier to focus on subjects inmotion.
Camera focuses automatically on
high-contrast subjects; display
shows areas in focus.
Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 97, 98) to cycle through AF modes in the following
order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE.

Autofocus

Focus Mode k (CONTINUOUS AF)
OptionDescription

Sample image

Focus tracks subject at selected focus point. Use for subjects moving
SINGLE POINT toward or away from camera.

r

y
ZONE

z
TRACKING

ALL

Focus tracks subjects moving
through wide area of frame.

5

Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 97, 98) to cycle through AF modes in the following
order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z TRACKING.

95

Taking PhotographsjCamera tracks focus in selected focus zone. Use for subjects that are
moving fairly predictably.

Focus-Point Selection
Choose a focus point for autofocus.
Viewing the Focus-Point Display

1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the focus-point display.

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial tochoose a focus area.

N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 31).

5
Taking Photographs

96Autofocus

Selecting a Focus Point
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
the focus point and the rear commanddial to choose the size of the focus frame.
The procedure varies with the option selected for AF mode.
Rear command
dial

Focus stick

DISP/BACK
buttonAF modeTiltryRotateChoose from 6
frame sizes
SelectChoose from 3
highlighted focus
frame sizes
point—

Select center
focus pointN • Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING is selected in focus mode l.
• If j ALL is selected for AF mode, you can rotate the rear commanddial in the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modesin the following order: r SINGLE POINT (6 frame sizes), y ZONE
(3 frame sizes), and either z WIDE (focus mode l) or z TRACKING(focus mode k).

97

5
Taking Photographsz

Select focus
point

Press

The Focus-Point Display
The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF
mode.

N Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the large
squares.

r SINGLE POINT

5

AF modey ZONEz WIDE/TRACKINGTaking Photographs

Number of points avail- Choose from zones with Position focus frame overable can be selected using 7 × 7, 5 × 5, or 3 × 3 focus subject you want to track
G AF/MF SETTING > points.
using continuous AF.
NUMBER OF FOCUS
POINTS.
Autofocus
Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may beunable to focus on the subjects listed below.
• Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies.
• Subjects photographed through a window or other reflective object.
• Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than reflect light, such as
hair or fur.
• Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or flame.
• Subjects that show little contrast with the background.
• Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is
also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a
backdrop of highly contrasting elements).

98

Autofocus

Checking Focus
To zoom in on the current focus area for precise
focus, press the center of the focus stick (focus
lever). Press up to two times more to zoom infurther and a fourth time to cancel zoom.

Normal display

Focus zoom

99

5
Taking Photographs

N • In focus mode l, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial.
• In focus mode l, select SINGLE POINT for AF MODE.
• Focus zoom is not available in focus mode k or when G AF/MF
SETTING > PRE-AF is on.
• Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING tochange the function performed by the center of the focus stick (focus
lever). D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING canalso be used to assign focus zoom to other controls.

Manual Focus
Adjust focus manually.

1 Select MANUAL FOCUS for G AF/MF
SETTING > FOCUS MODE.

2 Focus manually using the lens focus

ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce
the focus distance, right to increase.

5

3 Take pictures.

Taking Photographs

N • Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING toreverse the direction of rotation of the focus ring.
• Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.

100Manual Focus

Quick Focus• To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press

the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size ofthe focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial).
• In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a chosen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option
chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > xF INSTANT AF SETTING.

5
Taking Photographs101

Checking Focus
A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual
focus mode.
The Manual Focus Indicator
The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the focus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP > FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu),
the blue bar the depth of field, or in other words the distance infront of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus.
Focus distance(white line)

Depth of field

5
Taking Photographs

N • If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR

are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depthof-field indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button todisplay standard indicators.
• Use the G AF/MF SETTING > xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option
to choose how depth of field is displayed. Choose FILM FORMATBASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of field for
pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS tohelp you assess depth of field for pictures that will be viewed at highresolutions on computers or other electronic displays.

102

Manual Focus

Focus Zoom
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK, the camera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when thefocus ring is rotated. Press the center of the focus stick (focus lever)to exit zoom.

N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area.
• If OFF or FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >MF ASSIST, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial.
Zoom cannot be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITALMICROPRISM is selected.

5
Taking Photographs

103

Manual Focus

MF Assist
Use G AF/MF SETTING > MF ASSIST to choose a focus check option.
The following options are available:• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image
in the center of the frame. Frame thesubject in the split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four partsof the split image are correctly aligned.

• DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern thatemphasizes blur is displayed when thesubject is out of focus, disappearing to
be replaced by a sharp image when thesubject is in focus.

• FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con5

trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until
the subject is highlighted.

Taking Photographs

104Sensitivity
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
To view sensitivity settings, press the
ISO button.

Option
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO3
160–12800

N Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off.
Adjusting Sensitivity
High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower
values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note,however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities.

105

5
Taking Photographs

L (80/100/125)
H (25600/51200)

Description
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting conditions according to combination of standard andmaximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed chosen for A SHOOTING SETTING > ISO. Choose from
AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 (P 106).
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display.
Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may appear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range.

AUTO
Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum
shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3.
Item
DEFAULT SENSITIVITY
MAX. SENSITIVITY
MIN. SHUTTER SPEED

Options
160–12800
400–12800
⁄–¼ SEC, AUTO

AUTO1
800

Default
AUTO2
160
3200
AUTO

AUTO3
12800

The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the default and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above thedefault value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure
would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED.

N • If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that
5
Taking Photographs

selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set tothe value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTERSPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected
for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will automatically adjust the minimum shutter speed according to the focal
length of the lens (the setting remains the same whether image stabilization is on or off ).

106

Metering
Choose how the camera meters exposure.
A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY offers a choice of thefollowing metering options:

O The selected option will only take effect if OFF is selected for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the
G AF/MF SETTING menu.
Mode

o
MULTI

p
CENTERWEIGHTEDvw
AVERAGE

The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest
weight to the area at the center.
The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent
to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects andin other cases in which the background is much brighter or
darker than the main subject.
Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides
consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same lighting, and is particularly eﬀective for landscapes and portraits ofsubjects dressed in black or white.

N To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/
MF SETTING > INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 159).

107

5
Taking Photographs

SPOT

Description
The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recommended in most situations.

Exposure Compensation
Adjust exposure.
Rotate the rear command dial to adjust
exposure.

N • The command dial used in this role can be chosen using D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
• In manual mode, exposure can be adjusted by rotating the front orrear command dial after pressing a control to which d WHEN SETTO B (ON/OFF SWITCH) is assigned.

5

O • The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode.
• Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display,although the display may not accurately reflect its effects if:

Taking Photographs- the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 EV,- W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or- STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY.
Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfinder or LCD
monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, thedisplay may not accurately reflect the effects of exposure compensation during F-log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is selected for F DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by
selecting mode M and adjusting exposure directly.

108Focus/Exposure Lock
Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.

1 Position the subject in the focus

frame and press the shutter button
halfway to lock focus and exposure.
Focus and exposure will remain
locked while the shutter button ispressed halfway (AF/AE lock).

2 Press the button all the way down.

N Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available

when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF,
SHUTTER AE.

5
Taking Photographs

109

Focus/Exposure Lock

Other Controls
Focus and exposure can also be locked
using the AEL and AFON buttons. At default settings, you can use the AEL button
to lock exposure without locking focus.
If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCKONLY, it can similarly be used to lock focus without locking exposure.

AEL button(exposure lock)• While the assigned control is pressed,

5pressing the shutter button halfway will
not end the lock.
• If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > AE/
AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only beended by pressing the control a second
time.

AFON button

Taking Photographs

N • The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point
during exposure lock.
• The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposureand focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 298).

110

Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Capture motion in a series of pictures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.

2 If J CH HIGH SPEED BURST, J CH HIGH SPEED BURST(1.25X CROP), or O CL LOW SPEED BURST is selected, thecamera will take pictures continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed.

Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the
memory card is full.

all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if thespace available on the memory card is insufficient.
• Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken.
• Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus
mode.
• Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the flash
may not fire.
• Recording times may increase during burst shooting.
• The choice of burst modes varies with the option selected for
A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.

111

5
Taking Photographs

O • If file numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the remaining pictures will be recorded to a new folder.
• Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record

Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)

Focus and Exposure• Select focus mode CONTINUOUS AF to vary focus with shot.
• To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIALSETTING > SHUTTER AE.

N Depending on such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure compensation, exposure may not be adjusted automatically.

5
Taking Photographs

112Bracketing
Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight oneof the following:

OptionW ISO BKTV WHITE BALANCE BKT

P
114
114

Options BracketingP
115

3 Press the focus stick left or right to highlight the desired

5
Taking Photographs

bracketing settings.

4 Press MENU/OK to select.
5 Take pictures.

113

W ISO BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1⁄3, ±2⁄3, or ±1) in the drive mode
display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera will takea picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two
additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other withsensitivity lowered by the selected amount.
V WHITE BALANCE BKTSelect a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3) in the drive mode display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shotand processes it to create three copies: one at the current whitebalanced setting, one with fine-tuning increased by the selectedamount, and another with fine-tuning decreased by the selectedamount.

5
Taking Photographs114

Bracketings Bracketing
O AE BKTUse A SHOOTING SETTING > AE BKT SETTING to choose thebracketing amount, bracketing order, and number of shots. The
camera will take the specified number of shots in sequence: one
using the metered value for exposure and the others over- or under-exposed by multiples of the selected bracketing amount.

N Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed thelimits of the exposure metering system.

X FILM SIMULATION BKTEach time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot andprocesses it to create copies with different film simulation settings,
chosen using A SHOOTING SETTING > FILM SIMULATION BKT.

N While dynamic range bracketing is in effect, sensitivity will be restricted
to a minimum of ISO 640; the sensitivity previously in effect is restored
when bracketing ends.

115

5
Taking Photographs

Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKTEach time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes threeshots with different dynamic ranges: 100% for the first, 200% for
the second, and 400% for the third.

Z FOCUS BKTEach time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a series of photos, varying focus with each shot. The A SHOOTINGSETTING > FOCUS BKT SETTING item offers a choice of MANUAL
and AUTO bracketing.

N • Do not adjust zoom during shooting.
• Use of a tripod is recommended.
MANUALIn MANUAL mode, you choose the following.
OptionFRAMESSTEPINTERVAL

5

Description
Choose the number of shots.
Choose the amount focus changes with each shot.
Choose the interval between shots.

Taking Photographs

Focus and FRAMES/STEP
The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP
is shown in the illustration.

Step
Frames 1

2

3

4

5

Starting focus position• Focus proceeds from the starting position toward inﬁnity.
• Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to largerchanges.

• Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reaches inﬁnity.

116Bracketing

AUTO
In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP automatically.

1 Select A SHOOTING SETTING in the shooting menu, highlight FOCUS BKT SETTING, and press MENU/OK.

2 Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL.

The view through the lens will be displayed.

3 Focus on the nearest end of the subject and press MENU/OK.
The selected focus distance appears
as A on the focus distance indicator.

FOCUS BKT SETTINGSET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RINGSET POINT B

SETN The same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthestend of the subject first.

5
FOCUS BKT SETTINGSET POINT B
CONTROL THE FOCUS RINGSET POINT A

SETN Instead of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK
and select A again.

5 Take photographs.

The camera will calculate values for
FRAMES and STEP automatically. The
number of frames will appear in thedisplay.

NO

117

Taking Photographs

4 Focus on the farthest end of the subject and press DISP/BACK.
The selected focus distance (B) andfocus range (A to B) appear on thefocus distance indicator.

HDR
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes
three shots, varying exposure each time, and combinesthem into a single picture. The resulting photograph preserves details in highlights and shadows.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options and select HDR.

2 Choose the amount the brightnesses of the exposures vary.
OptionHDR AUTO

5
Taking Photographs

HDR200
HDR400
HDR800
HDR800+Description
Dynamic range is automatically set to a value of from 200%
to 800%.
Dynamic range is set to 200%.
Dynamic range is set to 400%.
Dynamic range is set to 800%.
Camera settings are adjusted for maximum variation in dynamic range.

3 Take photographs.

The camera will create a combined image.

118

HDR

O • Keep the camera steady.
• The desired results may not be achieved in the subject moves or thecomposition or lighting changes during shooting.

• The picture will be cropped a very small amount and the resolution
will drop slightly.

• Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value according to the scene.

• “Extended” sensitivity values are not supported.
• Depending on the options selected for HDR and sensitivity, pictures
may not be taken at the selected shutter speed.

• The flash does not fire.

N HDR images are indicated by a t icon during playback.

5
Taking Photographs

119Panoramas
Follow an on-screen guide to create a panorama.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options and select
PANORAMA.

2 To select the size of the angle through which you will pan thecamera while shooting, press the focus stick (focus lever) left.
Highlight a size and press MENU/OK.

3 Press the focus stick right to view a choice of pan directions.
Highlight a pan direction and press MENU/OK.

5

4 Press the shutter button all the way down to start recording.

Taking Photographs

There is no need to keep the shutter button pressed during
recording.

5 Pan the camera in the direction

shown by the arrow. Shooting ends
automatically when the camera ispanned to the end of the guides andthe panorama is complete.

120

Sweep camera along yellow
line in direction of
ANGLE

DIRECTION

Panoramas

For Best Results• Move the camera slowly in a small circle at a steady speed• Keep the camera parallel or at right angles to the horizon and be sure to
pan only in the direction shown by the guides• Try panning at a different speed if the desired results are not achieved• Prop your elbows against your sides• Use a tripod• For best results, use a lens with a focal length of 35 mm or less (50 mm orless in 35 mm format).

O • If the shutter button is pressed all the way down before the panorama
is complete, shooting will end and no panorama may be recorded.
• The last part of the panorama may not be recorded if shooting ends
before the panorama is complete.

• Panoramas are created from multiple frames, and the camera may insome cases be unable to stitch the frames together perfectly.

• Panoramas may be blurred if the subject is poorly lit.
• Shooting may be interrupted if the camera is panned too quickly or• If ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AE, exposure for the entire panorama is determined by the first frame.

121

5
Taking Photographs

too slowly. Panning the camera in a direction other than that shown
cancels shooting.
• The camera may in some cases record a greater or lesser angle thanselected.
• The desired results may not be achieved with:- Moving subjects- Subjects close to the camera- Unvarying subjects such as the sky or a field of grass- Subjects that are in constant motion, such as waves and waterfalls- Subjects that undergo marked changes in brightness

Panoramas

Viewing Panoramas
With the panorama displayed full frame, press the focus stick (focus lever)down to start panorama playback. Vertical panoramas will scroll vertically,horizontal panoramas horizontally.

PLAY
STOP

PAUSE

• In full-frame playback, you can use the rear command dial to zoom panoramas in or out.

• Panorama playback is controlled using the focus stick.

5

Full-frame
playback—
Start playback

Left/rightView other pictures

Taking Photographs

Focus stick(focus lever)
Up
Down

122

Panorama
Panorama
playback
playback paused
End playback
Pause playback
Resume playback
Choose pan
Scroll panorama
direction
manually

Multiple Exposures
Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and select
MULTIPLE EXPOSURE.

2 Choose a blend mode.
ADDITIVE

AVERAGE

BRIGHT

DARK

5

Description
The camera adds the exposures together. You may need tolower exposure compensation depending on the numberof shots.
The camera automatically optimizes exposure for the ﬁnal
picture. The background in series shot without changing
the composition will be optimally exposed.
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only thebrightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed depending on their brightness and hue.
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only thedarkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed depending on their brightness and hue.

3 Take the first shot.

123

Taking Photographs

OptionMultiple Exposures

4 Press MENU/OK. The first shot will beshown superimposed on the view
through the lens and you will beprompted to take the second shot.
NEXT
RETRY

EXIT

N • To return to the previous step and retake the first shot, press thefocus stick (focus lever) left.
• To save the first shot and exit without creating a multiple exposure, press DISP/BACK.
5 Take the second shot, using the first
frame as a guide.

EXIT

5

6 Press MENU/OK.

Taking Photographs

The combined exposures will be displayed as a guide to composing thenext shot.
RETRY

EXIT

N • To return to the previous step and retake the second shot, press
the focus stick left.
• To end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots
taken to this point, press DISP/BACK.

7 Make additional exposures.

Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures.

8 Press DISP/BACK to end shooting.

The camera will create the combined image and multiple exposure shooting will end.

124

The Shooting Menus

125

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust image quality settings for still photography.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the photo shooting display andselect the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECTEXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded.

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionO3:2
O 16 : 9Image size
6240 × 4160
6240 × 3512

OptionO1:1

Image size
4160 × 4160

Option
P3:2
P 16 : 9Image size
4416 × 2944
4416 × 2488

OptionP1:1

Image size
2944 × 2944

OptionQ3:2
Q 16 : 9Image size
3120 × 2080
3120 × 1760

Option
Q1:1

Image size
2080 × 2080

The following options are available in SPORTS FINDER MODE
and when 1.25X CROP is selected in burst mode:
Option
P3:2
P 16 : 9Image size
4992 × 3328
4992 × 2808

OptionP1:1

Image size
3328 × 3328

N IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned off or anothershooting mode is selected.

126

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

IMAGE QUALITY
Choose a file format and compression ratio.
OptionFINE

Description
Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images.
Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of
NORMAL
images that can be stored.
FINE + RAW
Record both RAW and ﬁne-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
NORMAL + RAW Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
RAW
Record RAW images only.
The Function Buttons
To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, assign RAW to afunction button (P 295). Press the button once to select the option in
the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column).
Option selected by pressing function
button to which RAW is assigned
FINE + RAW
NORMAL + RAW
FINE
NORMAL
FINE

127

6The Shooting Menus

Option currently selected for
IMAGE QUALITYFINE
NORMAL
FINE + RAW
NORMAL + RAW
RAW

RAW RECORDING
Choose whether to compress RAW images.
OptionUNCOMPRESSED

Description
RAW images are not compressed.
RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm
that reduces ﬁle size with no loss of image data. The images can be viewed in Capture One Express for Fujiﬁlm 1,
Capture One for Fujiﬁlm 1, Capture One 1, RAW FILELOSSLESS COMPRESSED CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX 2, FUJIFILM X RAWSTUDIO, or other software that supports “lossless” RAW
compression. Quality is the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting ﬁles are anywhere from about 30 to 90
percent of their uncompressed size.
RAW images are compressed using a “lossy”, non-reversible
algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED,COMPRESSED
but the resulting ﬁles are anywhere from about 25 to 35 percent of their uncompressed size.

6
The Shooting Menus

1 For information on when support will be available, visit:https://www.captureone.com/
2 For information on when support will be available, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-poweredby-silkypix/128

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

SELECT JPEG/HEIF
Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF.
OptionJPEG
HEIF

Description
Pictures are recorded in the widely-supported JPEG format.
Pictures are recorded in HEIF, a format with excellent compression but limited options for viewing and sharing.

O • JPEG is automatically selected in place of HEIF during filter-effect,
panorama, multiple-exposure, and HDR photography.
• Selecting HEIF disables CLARITY and sets COLOR SPACE to sRGB.
• HEIF pictures are stored on the memory card as files with the exten-

sion “.HIF”. Before the pictures can be viewed on a computer, the extension must be changed to “.HEIC”. This occurs automatically when
HEIF pictures are uploaded from the camera to a computer via USB.

6
The Shooting Menus

129

FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the effects of different kinds of film, including blackand-white (with or without color filters). Choose a palette according to your subject and creative intent.
OptionDescriptionc PROVIA/STANDARD Ideal for a wide range of subjects.

6
The Shooting Menus

d Velvia/VIVID

Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature.

e ASTIA/SOFT

Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look.

i CLASSIC CHROME

Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.

g PRO Neg. Hi

Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast.

h PRO Neg. Std

Ideal for portrait with soft gradations and skin tones.

g CLASSIC Neg.

Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image
depth.
Amber tinted highlights and rich shadow tone for printed
photo look.
Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for ﬁlm lookmovie.
Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suitable for still and movie.
Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness.
Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) ﬁlters,
which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues
complementary to the selected color.
• d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast anddarkens skies.
• c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies
considerably.
• b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait.

n NOSTALGIC Neg.
X ETERNA/CINEMAN ETERNA BLEACH
BYPASSa ACROS130

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Optionb MONOCHROME

f SEPIA

Description
Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red(R), and green (G) ﬁlters, which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues complementary to the selected color.
• e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast
and darkens skies.
• d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies considerably.
• f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones
in portrait.
Shoots in sepia tone.

N • Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness
settings.
• Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 286).
• For more information, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/global/tag/the-world-of-film-simulation/?post_type=xstories

6
The Shooting Menus

131

MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm orcool color cast) to the a ACROS andb MONOCHROME monochrome film
simulations. Color can be adjusted on the
WARM–COOL and G (Green)–M (Magenta)
axes.
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a film grain effect.
ROUGHNESS
OptionSTRONG
WEAK
OFF

6Description
Choose for rougher grains.
Choose for smoother grains.
Turn the eﬀect oﬀ.

SIZE

The Shooting Menus

Option
LARGE
SMALL

132

Description
Choose for coarser grains.
Choose for ﬁner grains.

MONOCHROMATIC COLOR

SETIMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

COLOR CHROME EFFECT
Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that
tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
OptionSTRONG
WEAK
OFF

Description
Choose for a strong eﬀect.
Choose for a weak eﬀect.
Turn the eﬀect oﬀ.

COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
OptionSTRONG
WEAK
OFF

Description
Choose for a strong eﬀect.
Choose for a weak eﬀect.
Turn the eﬀect oﬀ.

6
The Shooting Menus

133

WHITE BALANCE
For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches
the light source.

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionWA WHITE
PRIORITYAUTO
AA AMBIENCEPRIORITYk CUSTOM 1
l CUSTOM 2
m CUSTOM 3
k COLORTEMPERATURE
i DAYLIGHT
j SHADEk FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-1
l FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-2
m FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-3n INCANDESCENT

Description
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiterwhites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
White balance is adjusted automatically.
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
Measure a value for white balance.
Choose a color temperature.
For subjects in direct sunlight.
For subjects in the shade.
Use under “daylight” ﬂuorescent lights.
Use under “warm white” ﬂuorescent lights.
Use under “cool white” ﬂuorescent lights.

Use under incandescent lighting.
Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwaterg UNDERWATER
lighting.

N • In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired results—for

example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait
subjects—use custom white balance or choose a white balance option suited to the light source.
• White balance is adjusted for flash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITEPRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g modes. Turn the
flash off using other white balance options.
• White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 286).

134

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Fine-Tuning White Balance
Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a whitebalance option displays a fine-tuning
dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) tofine-tune white balance.

WB SHIFTSETN • To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after selecting a white balance option.
• You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when fine-tuning white balance.

6
The Shooting Menus

135

6

Custom White Balance
Choose k, l, or m to adjust white
CUSTOM 1
balance for unusual lighting conditions
using a white object as a reference (colored objects can also be used to lend
photos a color cast). A white balance tarSHUTTER : NEW WBSHIFTNOT CHANGE
get will be displayed; position and size
the target so that it is filled by the reference object and press the
shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (toselect the most recent custom value and exit without measuring
white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the mostrecent value and display the fine-tuning dialog).
• If “COMPLETED !” is displayed, press MENU/OKCOMPLETED !
to set white balance to the measured
value.
• If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposurecompensation and try again.
SET
CANCEL• If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure compensation and try again.

The Shooting Menus

k: Color Temperature
Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the lightsource.

N Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures “warmer” or “colder” or deliberately produce colors that differ radically from those in real
life.

136

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

1 Select k in the white balance menu.

The option currently selected for color temperature will be displayed.

WHITE BALANCECOLOR TEMPERATURE
R:0 B:0

SET

2 Edit the color temperature using theSHIFT

COLOR TEMPERATURE

focus stick (focus lever) and press
MENU/OK.
A fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.

SET

SHIFT

N • You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10 K byrotating the rear command dial.
• Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000 K.
• To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after
choosing a color temperature.

3 Highlight a fine-tuning amount using the focus stick.
4 Press MENU/OK.

6

Color Temperature
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of
direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature
have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature aretinged with blue.

137

The Shooting Menus

The changes will be applied. The selected color temperature will appear
in the display.

DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of detail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or
backlit scenes.
OptionDescription
V 100% Choose for increased contrast.
AUTO
W 200%
Reduce loss of detail in highlights.
X 400%O Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value
according to the scene.

N • If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either

V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting conditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to ISO 12800,
X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO 640 to 12800.

6
The Shooting Menus

D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-contrast scenes.
OptionAUTO
STRONG
WEAK
OFF

Description
Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions.
Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast
scenes.
Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately
high-contrast scenes.
Contrast reduction off.

N • WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to ISO 12800,
STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO 640 to 12800.
• When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and
DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically; if you wish to adjust these settings manually, choose OFF.
138

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

TONE CURVE
With reference to a tone curve, adjust theappearance of highlights or shadows,
making them harsher or softer. Choose
higher values to make shadows andhighlights harsher, lower values to makethem softer.
OptionHIGHLIGHTSSHADOWS

TONE CURVEHIGHLIGHTSSHADOWSSET

CANCEL

Description-2 to +4
-2 to +4

COLOR
Adjust color density.
−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0

+1

+2

+3

+4

SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
−3

−2

−1

Options
0

+1

+2

+3

+4

139

The Shooting Menus−4

6

HIGH ISO NR
Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose higher values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values toleave outlines visible.
−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0

+1

+2

+3

+4

CLARITY
Increase definition while altering tones in highlights and shadows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased definition, lower values for a softer effect.
−5

−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

O The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases
the time need to save each shot.

6

LONG EXPOSURE NR
Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures.

The Shooting Menus

Options
ON

OFF

O The additional processing required when ON is selected increases savetimes.

140

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
Select ON to improve definition by adjusting for diffraction andthe slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
Options
ON

OFF

COLOR SPACE
Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.
OptionsRGB
Adobe RGB

Description
Recommended in most situations.
For commercial printing.

PIXEL MAPPING
Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures.

1 Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGEQUALITY SETTING tab.

2 Highlight PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pix-O • Results are not guaranteed.
• Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping.
• Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is elevated.

• Processing may take a few seconds.

141

The Shooting Menus

el mapping.

6

x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Save custom camera settings for commonly-encountered situations. Saved settings can be recalled by rotating the mode dial topositions C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C7 (CUSTOM 7) (P 83).
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply automatically.
OptionENABLEDISABLE

Description
Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through
CUSTOM 7 apply automatically.
Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom
settings must be applied manually (P 85).

xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
Choose whether the current custom settings bank is to be used
for still photography or movie recording (P 83).

6
The Shooting Menus

142

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter. The
camera can store settings for multiple lenses (LENS 1 through
LENS 6).

N • DISTORTION CORRECTION, COLOR SHADING CORRECTION, andPERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION are available with lenses connected via an M mount adapter.
• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode
(P 200).

FOCAL LENGTH SETTINGEnter the lens’s true focal length.

LENS 5
INPUT FOCAL LENGTH

SET6

LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION

BARREL STRONGBARREL MEDIUMBARREL WEAKOFF
PINCUSHION WEAKPINCUSHION MEDIUMPINCUSHION STRONGThe Shooting Menus

DISTORTION CORRECTION
Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or
WEAK options to correct BARREL or
PINCUSHION distortion.

CANCEL143

COLOR SHADING CORRECTION
Color (shading) variations between thecenter and edges of the frame can be adjusted separately for each corner.
To use color shading correction, follow thesteps below.

NEXT

SET

1 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The selected corner is indicated by a triangle.

2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to adjust shading until there isno visible difference in color between the selected corner andthe center of the image.
• Press the focus stick left or right to adjust colors on thecyan–red axis.
• Press the focus stick up or down to adjust colors on theblue–yellow axis.

N To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction
6

while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.

The Shooting Menus

144

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
Choose from values between –5 and+5. Choosing positive values increases
peripheral illumination, while choosing
negative values reduces peripheral illumination. Positive values are recomSETCANCELmended for vintage lenses, negative values to create the effect of images taken with an antique lens or apinhole camera.

N To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination correction while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.

EDIT LENS NAME
Change the lens name.

6
The Shooting Menus

145

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust focus settings for still photography.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and selectthe G (AF/MF SETTING) tab.

AF/MF SETTING

FOCUS AREA
FOCUS MODE
AF MODE
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGSSTORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
AF POINT DISPLAY
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
PRE-AFEXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 96).
FOCUS MODE
Choose how the camera focuses (P 92).

6

AF MODE
Choose how the camera focuses in modes l and k (P 94).

The Shooting Menus

146

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
Select focus-tracking options for
CONTINUOUS AF focus mode. Choose
from Sets 1 (SET 1) through 5 (SET 5) according to your subject or select SET 6CUSTOM for custom focus-tracking options.

AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGSSET 1 MULTI PURPOSE

TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITYZONE AREA SWITCHING

AUTO
OK

Option147

6
The Shooting Menus

Description
A standard tracking option that works well withSET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
the typical range of moving subjects.
The focus system attempts to track the chosen
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES & subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to
CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely
to enter the focus area with the subject.
The focus system attempts to compensate for
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/
subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for
DECELERATING SUBJECT
subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
The focus system attempts to focus quickly on
SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING subjects entering the focus area. Choose for subSUBJECT
jects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switching subjects.
Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING
to sudden changes in velocity but also to large& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT
movements front to back and left to right.
Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED
TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA
SET 6 CUSTOM
SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on
the values for Sets 1–5 (P 148, 150).

Focus Tracking Options
The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set aredescribed below.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how long thecamera waits to switch focus when an
object enters the focus area behind or in
front of the current subject. The higher
the value, the longer the camera will wait.

TRACKING SENSITIVITY

QUICK

LOCKED ON

SETS THE TRACKINGSENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT
ADJUST

0

1

Options
2

3

SWITCH4

O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.

6
The Shooting Menus

SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how sensitive the tracking system is to changes insubject velocity. The higher the value,
the greater the precision with which thesystem attempts to respond to sudden
movement.
0

Options
1

SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY

STEADYACCEL./DECEL.

SETS THE SPEED TRACKINGSENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT
ADJUST

SWITCH2

O The higher the value, the more difficulty the camera will have focusing

in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when
the subject is highly reflective or low in contrast.

148

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

ZONE AREA SWITCHING
This parameter determines the focus
area given priority in zone AF.

ZONE AREA SWITCHING

CENTER AUTOFRONTSETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY
OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA
ADJUST

OptionFRONTAUTO
CENTERSWITCH

Description
Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera.
The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone
and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.

O This option takes effect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode.
Set Values
Parameter values for the different sets are listed below.
SPEED TRACKINGSENSITIVITY
0
0
2
1
2

ZONE AREA
SWITCHING
AUTO
CENTER
AUTO
FRONT
AUTO

149

6
The Shooting Menus

SET 1
SET 2
SET 3
SET 4
SET 5

TRACKINGSENSITIVITY
2
3
2
0
3

Custom Focus Tracking Options
Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6.

1 Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS >AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGSSET 6 CUSTOMSET 6 CUSTOM.

TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITYZONE AREA SWITCHING
ADJUSTAUTO

SET DETAIL

RESET

2 Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate
the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their
original values, press b.

3 Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.

6
The Shooting Menus

150

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in portrait orientation is stored separately from that used when thecamera is in landscape orientation.
OptionDescription
OFF
The same settings are used in both orientations.
FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately.
ON
The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately.

AF POINT DISPLAY yz
Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when
ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >AF MODE.
Options
ON

OFF

OptionDescription
Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point
117 POINTS (9 × 13)
grid.
Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point
425 POINTS (17 × 25)
grid.

151

6
The Shooting Menus

NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point selection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected
for AF MODE.

PRE-AF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus evenwhen the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera
adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the
shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps
prevent missed shots.
Options
ON

OFF

O Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery.
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist
autofocus.
Options
ON

6

OFF

The Shooting Menus

O • The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminatorin some cases.
• If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to thesubject.

• Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’seyes.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 203).

152

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
If the camera detects human faces, it willassign them priority over the backgroundand adjust settings appropriately for portraits when setting focus and exposure.
You can also choose whether the camera
focuses on the left or right eye when facedetection is on.
OptionO • If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may

not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture
is taken.
• In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as awhole rather than the portrait subject.
• Enabling Intelligent Face Detection via FACE DETECTION ON automatically selects OFF for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.

153

6
The Shooting Menus

Description
Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust
eye detection settings.
• g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only.
• u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye
to focus on when a face is detected.
FACE DETECTION
w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential•ON
ly on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
• v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferentially on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
OFFIntelligent Face Detection and eye priority oﬀ.

N • A single face detected in or near the focus area will be marked witha white frame.
• If multiple faces are detected in the focus area, the camera will selectone automatically.

• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to repo-

6
The Shooting Menus

sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is chosen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING >TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)or (during viewfinder photography) touch controls (P 31).
• When the camera is focused on an eye, you can switch from oneeye to the other using a function button to which RIGHT/LEFT EYE
SWITCH has been assigned.
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no face is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting.
• Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal orientation.
• If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they arehidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus
on faces.
• Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts(P 286).

154

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected
type, such as animals or vehicles, when setting focus.
OptionDescription
Select one of the subject types listed below to enable subject
detection.
• E ANIMAL: The camera detects and tracks focus on dogs andcats.
• F BIRD: The camera detects and tracks focus on birds.
• G AUTOMOBILE: The camera detects and tracks focus on
the body or front ends of cars, primarily those of types used
SUBJECTDETECTION ON for motor sports.
• H MOTORCYCLE&BIKE: The camera detects and tracks
focus on the riders of motorcycles and bicycles.
• I AIRPLANE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the
cockpits, noses, or bodies of airplanes.
• J TRAIN: The camera detects and tracks focus on the drivercompartments or front ends of trains.
OFF
Subject detection oﬀ.
ly selects OFF for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING.

155

6
The Shooting Menus

O Enabling subject detection via SUBJECT DETECTION ON automatical-N • A single subject of the chosen type detected in or near the focus area
will be marked with a white frame.
• If multiple subjects are detected in the focus area, the camera will
select one automatically.

• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to reposition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is chosen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING >TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)or (during viewfinder photography) touch controls (P 31).
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no subject of the chosen type is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, subject detection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting.
• Subjects can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal
orientation.
• Subject detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts(P 286).

6
The Shooting Menus

156

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

AF+MF
If ON is selected and focus has been locked (whether by pressing
the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can beended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring.
Options
ON

OFF

O • Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus

mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables thefocus distance indicator.
• If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus
ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set toinfinity or the minimum focus distance.

N • The previously-selected focus mode will be restored if no operations
are performed for a set period after the focus ring is rotated.
• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE and DIGITAL MICROPRISM focus assist options selected via MF ASSIST cannot be used.

157

6
The Shooting Menus

AF + MF Focus Zoom
Selecting ON for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK when SINGLE
POINT is chosen for AF MODE lets you zoom in on the current focus areaby rotating the focus ring. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rearcommand dial.

MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode.
OptionDescription
Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR)DIGITAL SPLIT split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the
IMAGE
split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts ofthe split image are correctly aligned.
A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject
DIGITALis out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when
MICROPRISM
the subject is in focus.
FOCUS PEAK The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and
HIGHLIGHT peaking level.
Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking, digital split image, andOFFdigital microprism are not available).

6

FOCUS CHECK
If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on theselected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode.

The Shooting Menus

Options
ON

OFF

N • Press the focus stick (focus lever) to cancel focus zoom.
• The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes
when the focus area is changed.

158

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA
Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or
MULTI metering is selected.
OptionsON

OFF

xF INSTANT AF SETTING
Chooses how the camera focuses when a button to which focus
lock or AF-ON is assigned is pressed with MANUAL FOCUS selected for FOCUS MODE.
OptionAF-S
AF-C

Description
The camera focuses when the button is pressed.
The camera focuses while the button is pressed.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 204).
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
Choose the basis for the depth-of-field scale.

6

Description
Provides a precision reference for use when assessing depth of ﬁeld
PIXEL BASIS for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computersor other electronic displays.
Provides a practical reference for use when assessing depth of ﬁeld
FILM FORMAT
for pictures that will be viewed at lower resolutions, for example
BASIS
as prints.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 204).

159

The Shooting Menus

OptionRELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
Choose how the camera focuses when the shutter button ispressed all the way down with SINGLE AF or CONTINUOUS AF
selected for FOCUS MODE.
OptionRELEASE
FOCUS

Description
Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken
when the camera is not in focus.
Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only
taken when the camera is in focus.

O Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when thecamera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF.

6
The Shooting Menus

160

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

xF AF RANGE LIMITER
Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus
speed.
OptionOFF

CUSTOMPRESET1
PRESET2

Description
Focus limiter disabled.
Limit focus to a range of distances deﬁned by a minimum andmaximum.
• OK: Limit focus to the selected range.
• SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance between them.
Limit focus to a preset range.

O • Choosing a focus range that includes distances shorter than the minimum focus distance of the lens disables the focus limiter.
• The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may differ fromthe actual focus distance.

• Focus range can be set independently on lenses equipped with focus range selectors. Be sure that the option selected in the camera
menus overlaps with that chosen with the lens.

range.

- Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum
focus distance to infinity by rotating the focus ring.

• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 204).

161

The Shooting Menus

N • The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM
is selected:- You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus

6

TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode

Description

Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
TOUCH
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your ﬁnger
SHOOTING on the display.

• In focus mode l (SINGLE AF), the camera focuses when you
AF

AF OFFtap your subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode k (CONTINUOUS AF), the camera initiates focus
when you tap your subject display. The camera will continue
to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until
you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In manual focus mode p (MANUAL FOCUS), you can tap thedisplay to focus on the selected subject using autofocus.

AREA

Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.

OFF

Touch screen mode oﬀ.

6
The Shooting Menus

N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREENSETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.

162

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs theoperations below.

Mode
TOUCH SHOOTING
AF
AREA
OFF

Operation performed
SINGLE AF/MANUAL FOCUS: Take a picture
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
SINGLE AF/MANUAL FOCUS: OFF

Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.

6
The Shooting Menus

163

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust shooting options for still photography.
To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and selectthe A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab.

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.

SHOOTING SETTINGFILTER SETTING
SPORTS FINDER MODE
PRE-SHOTSELF-TIMERSAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
SELF-TIMER LAMPINTERVAL TIMER SHOOTINGINTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHINGEXIT

FILTER SETTING
Choose the filter used when the mode dial is rotated to FILTER(P 82).
SPORTS FINDER MODE
Take pictures using the crop in the centerof the display. Choose this option for pictures of athletes, birds, and other moving
subjects.

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionON
OFF

Description
Pictures are taken using a 1.25× crop, reducing the picture angle by anamount equivalent to increasing lens focal length by 1.25×; the cropis shown by a frame in the display.
The 1.25× crop is disabled.

N • The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE item in the shooting menu is fixed at P.
• The sports finder is not available in modes that offer an electronic
shutter.

164

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

PRE-SHOT sJ
To reduce the lag between your pressing the shutter button all
the way down and the resulting picture being recorded to thememory card, the camera starts shooting with the electronic
shutter when the shutter button is pressed halfway and saves aseries shots starting just before the shutter button is pressed therest of the way down.
Options
ON

OFF

N • Pre-shot photography is available only when s ELECTRONICSHUTTER is selected in CH (high speed burst) drive mode (P 171).
• Flash photography is disabled.

6
The Shooting Menus

165

SELF-TIMER
Choose a shutter release delay.
OptionDescription
The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter
R 2 SEC
button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts
down.
The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
S 10 SEC Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The
self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken.
OFF
Self-timer oﬀ.

6

If an option other than OFF is selected, the timer will start when the shutter
button is pressed all the way down. The
display shows the number of seconds remaining until the shutter is released. To
stop the timer before the picture is taken,press DISP/BACK.

9The Shooting Menus

O • Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing infront of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure.
• The self-timer turns off automatically when the camera is turned off.

166

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
If ON is selected, the setting chosen for SELF-TIMER will remainin effect after the camera is turned off.
Options
ON

OFF

SELF-TIMER LAMP
If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer
photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in othersituations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit.
Options
ON

OFF

6
The Shooting Menus

167

INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
Configure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset
interval.

1 Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING

in the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab
and press MENU/OK.

INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMESINTERVALNUMBER OF TIMES

END

2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to

CANCELSTART WAITING TIME

choose the interval and number ofshots. Press MENU/OK to proceed.

LATER

ESTIMATED START TIME
START

PM
CANCEL

3 Use the focus stick to choose thestarting time and then press MENU/OK.
Shooting will start automatically.

6
The Shooting Menus

CANCELO Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of“bulb” or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only
one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released.

N • Use of a tripod is recommended.
• We recommend using an AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
• The display turns off between shots and lights a few seconds before
the next shot is taken.

• The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button.
• To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals thenumber of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photography started, set the number of shots to ∞.

168

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer
photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots.
Options
ON

OFF

O • Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-

ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVALTIMER SHOOTING > INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim
dramatically during shooting.
• In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an
AUTO option is selected for ISO.

6
The Shooting Menus

169

AE BKT SETTING
Adjust exposure bracketing settings.
OptionDescription
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequenceand the amount exposure is varied with each shot.
FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing•
FRAMES/STEP SETTING
sequence.
• STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with eachshot.
• 1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken
one at a time.
1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS• CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence aretaken in a single burst.
SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken.

FILM SIMULATION BKTChoose the three film simulation types used for film simulation
bracketing (P 130).

6
The Shooting Menus

FOCUS BKT SETTING
Choose from AUTO and MANUAL focus bracketing modes(P 116).
PHOTOMETRY
Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 107).

170

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

SHUTTER TYPE
Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mutethe shutter sound.
OptionDescriptiont MECHANICAL SHUTTER Take pictures with the mechanical shutter.
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER Take pictures with the electronic shutter.
t E-FRONT CURTAIN
Take pictures with the electronic front curtain shutter.
SHUTTERThe camera chooses the mechanical or electronicu MECHANICAL +shutter according to shooting conditions.
ELECTRONIC
The camera chooses the mechanical or electronicv E-FRONT +front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions.
MECHANICALThe camera chooses the mechanical, electronic, or
w E-FRONT +electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting
MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC
conditions.

O • When using the electronic shutter, note the following:- Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects.
- Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at highshutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended.

- Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under fluorescent lights
your subjects’ image rights and right to privacy.

• When using the electronic front-curtain shutter, note the following:- Faster shutter speeds are more likely to result in uneven exposureand loss of resolution in out-of-focus areas of the frame.

N The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:• Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 12800–160• Long exposure noise reduction has no effect

171

The Shooting Menus

or other flickering or erratic illumination.

- When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 252), respect

6

FLICKER REDUCTION
Reduce flicker in pictures and the display when shooting underfluorescent lighting and other similar light sources.
OptionDescription
Flicker reduction is applied to all frames continuous
shooting frame rate reduces.
Flicker measurement is taken prior to the ﬁrst frame only
and the same reduction amount is applied to all subsequent frames that ﬂicker may occur.
Flicker reduction disabled.

ALL FRAMESFIRST FRAMEOFFO • Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures.
• Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording.
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Select ON to allow shutter speed to be fine-tuned to reduce flicker caused by LED lighting and the like.
Options

6

ON

The Shooting Menus

N This option takes effect only in modes S and M.

172

OFF

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or off.
OptionCONTINUOUS
SHOOTING ONLYOFF

Description
Image stabilization on.
Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button
is released (or, if CONTINUOUS AF is selected for G AF/
MF SETTING > FOCUS MODE, while the shutter button is pressed halfway).
Image stabilization oﬀ ; x appears in the display.

N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with IS MODE.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.

ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light (P 105).
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
Adjust settings for optional cooling fans (P 334).
AUTO1
AUTO2
LOW
HIGH
OFF

Description
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
temperature rises and runs at slow speed.
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
temperature rises and runs at high speed. The increased
fan noise may be audible in movies.
Run the fan continuously at low speed.
Run the fan continuously at high speed. The increased fannoise may be audible in movies.
Turn the fan oﬀ.

173

The Shooting Menus

Option6

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest version of apps. The
smartphone can then be used to:• Control the camera and take pictures remotely• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures• Upload location data to the camera

N For more information, visit:https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

6
The Shooting Menus

174

FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust flash-related settings for still photography.
To display flash settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and selectthe F (FLASH SETTING) tab.

FLASH SETTINGFLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVALTTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTINGCOMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTINGEXIT

FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
Choose a flash control mode, flash mode,or sync mode or adjust the flash level.
The options available vary with the flash.

N For more information on flash settings, see“External Flash Units” (P 315) in “Peripherals and Optional Accessories”.

MODE
EF-X8

ADJUST

END

RED EYE REMOVAL
Remove red-eye effects caused by the flash.
Description
Flash red-eye reduction only.
Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal oﬀ.

The Shooting Menus

Option
FLASH
OFF

6

N Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL flash control mode.

175

TTL-LOCK MODE
Instead of adjusting flash level with each shot, TTL flash control
can be locked for consistent results across a series of photographs.
OptionDescription
Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most
LOCK WITH LAST FLASH
recent photo.
LOCK WITH METERING The camera emits a series of pre-ﬂashes and locks ﬂash
FLASH
output at the metered value.

N • To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use
the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 295).
• Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in effect.
• Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if nopreviously metered value exists.

6

LED LIGHT SETTING
Choose whether to use the flash unit’s LED video light (if available) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos.

The Shooting Menus

OptionCATCHLIGHT
AF ASSIST
AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT
OFF

Role of LED video light in still photography
Catchlight
AF-assist illuminator
AF-assist illuminator and catchlight
None

N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.

176

FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)

COMMANDER SETTING
Choose groups when using the camera flash unit as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control. This option isavailable when the camera is used with clip-on flash units that
support Fujifilm optical wireless flash control.
Options
Gr A

Gr B

Gr C

OFF

N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.

CH SETTING
Choose the channel used for communication between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used
for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity.
Options
CH1

CH2

CH3

6

CH4

The Shooting Menus

177

MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust options for movies shot during still photography using the t (movie recording) button.
To display movie settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and selectthe B (MOVIE SETTING) tab.

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.

MOVIE SETTING

MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTINGF IS MODE
F IS MODE BOOSTAUDIO SETTINGEXIT

MOVIE MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 183). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
HIGH SPEED REC
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 184). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.

6
The Shooting Menus

MEDIA REC SETTING
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 185). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F IS MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 193). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F IS MODE BOOSTThis item is also found in the movie menus (P 193). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.

178

MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)

AUDIO SETTING
Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording.
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
OptionAUTO
MANUALOFF

Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus
lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels.
Turn the built-in microphone oﬀ.

EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.
OptionAUTO
MANUALOFF

Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus
lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels.
Disable recording using external microphones.

6

OptionMIC
LINE

Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external microphone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.

MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON

OFF

179

The Shooting Menus

MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.

WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
Options
ON

OFF

LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-frequency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON

HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option0
1—10

6
The Shooting Menus

180

Description
Mute output to the headphones.
Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.

OFFMOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)

XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
OptionN • If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone

jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected formovie file format.

181

6
The Shooting Menus

Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with thehelp of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound withthe help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones orother audio monitors during movie recording.
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con•
4ch AUDIO MONITORING
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in microphone.
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
HDMI 4ch AUDIO
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI conOUTPUT
nector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust movie-recording options.
To display options for movie recording,press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the B (MOVIE SETTING)tab.

MOVIE SETTING

MOVIE SETTING LIST
SHOOTING MODE
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTINGHDMI OUTPUT SETTINGFIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
EXIT

MOVIE SETTING LIST
View current movie recording settings.

N These options can also be viewed by pressing the DISP/BACK button while
the movie quick menu is displayed.

SHOOTING MODE
Choose a shooting mode for movies.
Options

6

PROGRAM AE

The Shooting Menus

182

SHUTTERPRIORITY AE

APERTURE
PRIORITY AE

MANUALMOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

MOVIE MODE
Before shooting movies, choose theframe rate and the frame size and aspectratio.

MOVIE MODE

3840 × 2160
1h18m31s
CANNOT USE S.S. SLOWER THAN FRAMERATEEND

CANCEL1 In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then highlight MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight thedesired frame size and aspect ratio (A) and press the stickright.
• Choose J 3 : 2 for 6.2 K movies with an aspect ratio of 3 : 2.
• Choose V16 : 9 or d17 : 9 for 4K movies with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
• Choose W16 : 9 or W17 : 9 for Full HD movies with aspectratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
frame rate (B) and press MENU/OK.
23.98P

24P

25P

Options
29.97P

50P

59.94P

N The choice of frame rates varies with the movie mode.

183

The Shooting Menus

3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a

6

HIGH SPEED REC
Record high-frame-rate movies. High-frame-rate movies can beplayed back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving
subjects or details too fleeting for the naked eye. Select ON tochoose the recording and playback rates separately.

N Choose ON HDMI ONLY to record footage only to external recorders

connected via HDMI. Note that this option does not support playback
frame-rate selection.

Frame Size
Options
V16 : 9d17 : 9W16 : 9W17 : 9Playback
23.98P

6

24P

25P

Options
29.97P

50P

59.94P

Recording

The Shooting Menus

Options
100P

120P

200P

240P

N • High-speed movies are recorded with no sound.
• The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with thegoal of maintaining the selected bit rate.

• The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected
for rate of recording.

184

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, bitrate, and proxy video.
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, andcompression.
Destination
Choose save options and save and output destinations for movies.
OptionP
Q
R
TU

Description
Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 1.
Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 2.
Footage is recorded to the memory card in Slot 1 until the cardﬁlls. Any additional footage will then automatically be recorded to the card in Slot 2.
Each movie is recorded twice, once to each card.
Movies are recorded only to devices connected via HDMI.

185

6
The Shooting Menus

O The current movie mode applies to both copies; settings for backup
copies cannot be adjusted separately.

File Type and Compression
Choose the movie file type and compression.
OptionH.264 ALL-I 420 MOV

H.264 LongGOP 420 MOV

H.264 LongGOP 420 MP4

H.265 ALL-I 420 MOV

H.265 LongGOP 420 MOV

6The Shooting Menus

H.265 ALL-I 422 MOV

H.265 LongGOP 422 MOV
ProRes HQ MOV *ProRes 422 MOV *ProRes LT MOV *Description
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage isrecorded at a depth of 8 bits using All-I interframe
compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage isrecorded at a depth of 8 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded
to the web.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma
sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma
sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2chroma sub-sampling.
Record movies in ProRes 422 HQ format.
Record movies in ProRes 422 format.
Record movies in ProRes 422 LT format.

* Available only when P is selected as the destination.

186

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)N • The ProRes format is intended for the footage will be edited on acomputer or the like.
• 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling is used for footage output to external

devices connected via HDMI; H.264 footage is output at a bit depth of
8 bits and footage in other formats at a depth of 10 bits.
• All-I compresses each frame separately. Files are larger, but the factthat the data for each frame are saved separately makes this a good
choice for footage that will be further processed.
• Long GOP balances good image quality with high compression. Filesare smaller, making it a good choice for longer movies.
• The options available for file type and compression vary with the options selected for MOVIE MODE, HIGH SPEED REC, and F-Log/HLG
RECORDING.

Bit Rate
Choose the movie bit rate.
50Mbps100Mbps

Options
200Mbps360Mbps

720MbpsN • The options available for bit rate vary with the settings chosen for

187

6
The Shooting Menus

high-speed movie recording and compression. The actual bit rate
may be slower than the selected value depending on the subject.
• The bit rate for ProRes movies is set automatically according to theformat chosen and the frame size and rate. For more information, visit
the Apple website.

PROXY SETTING (ONLY WHEN REC ProRes)
Choose whether the camera simultaneously records a duplicate“proxy” video with movies shot in ProRes format.
OptionDescription
ON (H.264)
Record proxy videos in H.264 format.
ON (ProRes Proxy) Record proxy videos in ProRes Proxy format.
OFF
Proxy recording disabled.

O • Deleting the original footage from the camera also deletes the proxy
video. The original and proxy videos cannot be deleted separately.
• When deleting movies from camera memory cards using a computer,be sure to delete both the originals and the proxies.

6
The Shooting Menus

188

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is output to an
HDMI device.
HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY
If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected
will mirror the information in the camera display.
Options
ON

OFF

HDMI REC CONTROL
Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals
to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to startand stop movie recording.
Options
ON

OFF

OptionDescription
RAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to ATOMOS video recorders.
SETTING ATOMOSRAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to Blackmagic Design video recorders.
SETTING BlackmagicOFF
Do not output RAW footage to external recorders.

189

6
The Shooting Menus

RAW OUTPUT SETTING
Choose whether to output RAW footage to external recorders
connected via HDMI.

N • RAW footage output to external devices is not saved to the memory
cards inserted in the camera.
• In-camera image enhancements are not applied to the RAW output.
• ISO sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 1000 and ISO 12800.
• Footage with a frame size of 4848 × 2728 (4.8 K) is recorded using a
1.29× crop.

• Footage output to external devices is generated from the original
RAW data and its quality, which varies with device specifications, may
not be equal to that achieved as the end result of post-productionor the like.
• Focus zoom is not available when RAW is selected for HDMI output.
• RAW footage output via HDMI to incompatible devices will not display correctly but will instead will display as a mosaic.
• RAW output is disabled in some movie and high-speed recording
modes.

FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
Fix the movie crop ratio at 1.38∶1. This makes it easier to match
crops after changing movie settings.

6

Options

The Shooting Menus

ON

190

OFF

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

F-Log/HLG RECORDING
Choose the destination for F‐Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma)movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device.
OptionDescription
The footage is processed using ﬁlm simulation and bothcPYP
saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output toc F-Log Y F-Log
the HDMI device in F-Log format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output toc FLog2 Y FLog2
the HDMI device in F-Log2 format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output toc HLG Y HLG
the HDMI device in HLG format.

N • F-Log and FLog2 offer gentle gamma curves with wide gamuts suit-

191

6
The Shooting Menus

able for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted tovalues between ISO 640 and ISO 12800 (F-Log) or between ISO 1250
and ISO 12800 (FLog2).
• The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the international ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible
displays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast
scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between
ISO 1000 and ISO 12800.
• Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selectedfor H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > F FILM SIMULATION in theshooting menu.

DATA LEVEL SETTING
Choose a signal range for movie recording.
OptionVIDEO RANGEFULL RANGE

Description
The signal range for 8-bit movies is limited to 16–235 and thatfor 10-bit movies to 64–940.
The signal ranges for 8-bit and 10-bit movies are respectively
0–255 and 0–1023.

F PHOTOMETRY
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 107).
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 172).
Options
ON

6
The Shooting Menus

192

OFF

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

F IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or off.
OptionIBIS/OISIBIS/OIS + DIS
OFFDescription
Enable in-body (IBIS) and optical (OIS) image stabilization.
IBIS is used with lenses that do not support OIS.
Enable in-body (IBIS), optical (OIS), and digital (DIS) image
stabilization. The crop is adjusted according to the option
selected for MOVIE MODE.
Image stabilization oﬀ ; x appears in the display.

N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.

F IS MODE BOOST
Choose the image stabilization level.
OptionON
OFF

Description
Suitable for hand-held shooting with no panning.
Suitable for hand-held shooting with panning.

6

bilization level to be changed while recording is in progress (P 295).

193

The Shooting Menus

N Assigning IS MODE BOOST to a function button allows the image sta-

F ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
OptionH (25600)
160–12800
AUTO

Description
Choose for special situations. Note that dynamic range may be
reduced and that pictures may be mottled.
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display.
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting
conditions.

ZEBRA SETTING
Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes
in the movie mode display.

6

OptionZEBRA RIGHT

Right-slanting stripes.

Description

ZEBRA LEFT
OFF

Left-slanting stripes.
Stripes oﬀ.

The Shooting Menus

ZEBRA LEVEL
Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display.
50

194

55

60

65

70

Options
75
80

85

90

95

100

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only thecommand dials and touch-screen controls. You may find thishelpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being recorded with movies (P 33).
Options
ON

OFF

TALLY LIGHT
Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie
recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.

Indicator lamp

6

Description
The indicator lamp lights during movie recording.
The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording.
The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording.
The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain oﬀ during movie recording.

195

The Shooting Menus

OptionFRONT OFFREAR zFRONT OFFREAR yFRONT zREAR zFRONT zREAR OFFFRONT yREAR yFRONT yREAR OFFFRONT OFFREAR OFF

AF-assist illuminator

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)xF COOLING FAN SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 173).
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 83).
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 142).
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
Choose whether the current custom settings bank is to be used
for still photography or movie recording (P 83).
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONThis item is also found in the photo menus (P 174).

6
The Shooting Menus

196

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust image quality settings for movies.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display andselect the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGFFILM SIMULATIONFMONOCHROMATIC COLOR
FWHITE BALANCE
FDYNAMIC RANGEFTONE CURVEFCOLORFSHARPNESSFHIGH ISO NR
EXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FILM SIMULATION
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 130).
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 132).

6
The Shooting Menus

197

F WHITE BALANCE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 134).
F DYNAMIC RANGE
Choose a dynamic range for movie recording.
Option
V100%
W200%
X400%

Description
See “DYNAMIC RANGE” (P 138).

N • AUTO (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during
movie recording.
• W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to ISO 12800,
X400% at sensitivities of from ISO 640 to 12800.

• This item is available when cPYP is selected for B MOVIESETTING > F-Log/HLG RECORDING.

6
The Shooting Menus

F TONE CURVE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 139).
F COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 139).

198

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)

F SHARPNESS
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 139).
F HIGH ISO NR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 140).
INTERFRAME NR
Select AUTO to automatically adjust interframe noise reduction
according to shooting conditions.
Options
AUTO

OFF

N “Ghosting” may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting.

6
The Shooting Menus

199

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)

F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION
Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during
movie recording.
OptionsON

OFF

N • If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera
is attached, peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to theoption selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > xF MOUNTADAPTOR SETTING > PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
in the shooting menu (P 145).
• Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this option.

xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 143). Changes to
one apply to the other.

6
The Shooting Menus

200

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust focus settings for movies.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and selectthe G (AF/MF SETTING) tab.

AF/MF SETTINGFFOCUS AREA
F FOCUS MODE
F AF MODE
FAF-C CUSTOM SETTINGxFAF ILLUMINATOR
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTINGFSUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
FAF+MFEXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 96).

O The focus area for movie recording cannot be resized.
F FOCUS MODE
Choose the focus mode for movie recording.

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionDescription
p MANUAL FOCUS Focus manually.
k CONTINUOUS AF The camera focuses using AF-C.
The camera focuses using AF-S.
l SINGLE AF

201

F AF MODE
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording.
Option
MULTI
AREA

Description
The camera selects the focus area automatically.
The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area.

F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
Select focus-tracking options when recording movies with
CONTINUOUS AF selected for F FOCUS MODE.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an object enters the focus area behind or in front of the current subject. See “TRACKING SENSITIVITY” (P 148).
06

Options
2

1

3

4

The Shooting Menus

O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.

AF SPEED
Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values forfaster response times, lower values for slower response times.
−5

202

−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)xF AF ILLUMINATOR
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 152). Changes to
one apply to the other.
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording
movies.
OptionFACE DETECTION ON
OFF

Description
See “g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING” (P 153).
Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority oﬀ.

O If SINGLE AF is chosen for FOCUS MODE when FACE DETECTION
ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING, the camera will automatically switch to CONTINUOUS AF.
Selecting MANUAL FOCUS when FACE DETECTION ON is selected
for Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING disables Intelligent Face
Detection.

O The camera automatically switches to continuous AF when SUBJECT

DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > F SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING, even if SINGLE AF is selected for FOCUS
MODE. Subject detection is not available when MANUAL FOCUS is
selected.

F AF+MF
Select ON to enable manual focus in SINGLE AF and CONTINUOUS
AF modes. Manual focus can be suspended by pressing the AFON
button.
Options
ON

OFF

203

6
The Shooting Menus

F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 155).

F MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed when MANUAL FOCUS is selected for FOCUS MODE.
OptionDescription
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT
color and peaking level.
OFF
Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking is not available).

F FOCUS CHECK
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 158).
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 159). Changes to
one apply to the other.

N Instant AF is disabled during movie recording. Use instant AF to focus
before recording begins.

6
The Shooting Menus

xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 159). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 161). Changes to
one apply to the other.

204

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode

AF

AREA

Touch screen mode oﬀ.

N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREENSETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.

205

6
The Shooting Menus

OFF

Description
Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point.
Use the shutter button to start and stop recording.
• When SINGLE AF is selected for FOCUS MODE, you can
refocus at any time by tapping your subject in the display.
• When CONTINUOUS AF is chosen for FOCUS MODE, thecamera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
• When MANUAL FOCUS is selected for FOCUS MODE, thecamera will focus using autofocus if you tap the display before
recording begins; during recording, you can tap the display
again to move the focus area to a new location.
Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to startand stop recording.
• When SINGLE AF is selected for FOCUS MODE, you canreposition the focus area at any time by tapping your subject
in the display. To focus, use the button to which AF-ON is assigned.
• When CONTINUOUS AF is chosen for FOCUS MODE, thecamera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
• When MANUAL FOCUS is selected for FOCUS MODE,
you can tap the display to position the focus area over yoursubject.

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs theoperations below.

Mode
AF
AREA
OFF

6

Operation performed
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
SINGLE AF/MANUAL FOCUS: OFF

The Shooting Menus

Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.

FOCUS CHECK LOCK
Choose whether focus zoom remains in effect once movie recording begins.
Options
ON

206

OFF

AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust settings for audio recorded during filming.
To display audio settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and selectthe P (AUDIO SETTING) tab.

AUDIO SETTING

INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENTMIC JACK SETTINGMIC LEVEL LIMITER
WIND FILTERLOW CUT FILTERHEADPHONES VOLUMEXLR MIC ADAPTER SETTINGEXIT

INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
OptionAUTO
MANUALOFF

Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recordinglevels.
Turn the built-in microphone oﬀ.

EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.

MANUALOFF

Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recordinglevels.
Disable recording using external microphones.

207

The Shooting Menus

OptionAUTO

6

MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
OptionMIC
LINE

Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external microphone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.

MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON

OFF

WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.

6

Options

The Shooting Menus

ON

OFF

LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-frequency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON

HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option0
1—10

208

Description
Mute output to the headphones.
Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.

OFFAUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)

XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
OptionN • If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone

jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected formovie file format.

209

6
The Shooting Menus

Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with thehelp of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound withthe help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones orother audio monitors during movie recording.
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con•
4ch AUDIO MONITORING
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in microphone.
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
HDMI 4ch AUDIO
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI conOUTPUT
nector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.

TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame number) display settings for movie recording.
To display time code settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display
and select the Q (TIME CODE SETTING)
tab.

TIME CODE SETTINGTIME CODE DISPLAY
START TIME SETTING
COUNT UP SETTINGDROP FRAME
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT

EXIT

TIME CODE DISPLAY
Select ON to display time codes during movie recording andplayback.
Options
ON

6

START TIME SETTING
Choose the time code starting time.

The Shooting Menus

OptionDescription
MANUAL INPUT Choose a start time manually.
CURRENT TIME Set the start time to the current time.
RESET
Set the start time to 00:00:00.

210

OFF

TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)

COUNT UP SETTING
Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during
movie recording.
OptionREC RUN
FREE RUN

Description
Time is clocked only during movie recording.
Time is clocked continuously.

DROP FRAME
At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradually develop between the time code (measured in seconds) andthe actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second).
Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to matchthe recording time to the time code.
OptionON
OFF

Description
The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict
match between the time code and the actual recording time.
Frames are not dropped.

N • The time code display varies with the option selected.

6
The Shooting Menus

ON

OFF

• Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop.

211

TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)

HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices.
Options
ON

6
The Shooting Menus

212

OFF

Playback and the Playback
Menu

213

The Playback Display
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed
during playback.

O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
A
k
j
i
h
Playback and the Playback Menu

7

B CD E FG H I

J

12/31/2022 1/999

g
f
e
d
c
b
K
a
Z

Y

X W

V

U T S R Q PO

N M L

A Date and time..................................52, 54, 245 T White balance ..............................................134
B Frame-number display
U Sensitivity .......................................................173
C Location data................................................284 V Exposure compensation ............................108
D Bluetooth ON/OFF
W Aperture...............................................73, 76, 78
E Image transfer order
X Time code.......................................................210
F Image transfer status
Y Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 78
G Number of frames selected for upload
Z Playback mode indicator .............................59
H Protected image ...........................................227 a Movie icon ........................................................69
I Card slot..........................................................219 b Four-channel (quadrophonic) audio
J Frame number..............................................281..............................................................181, 209
K Low battery ......................................................51 c HDR image ....................................................118
L Image quality................................................127 d Red-eye removal indicator........................175
M Movie mode ..................................................182 e Filter ....................................................................82
N HEIF ..................................................................129 f Face detection indicator ............................153
O Image size ......................................................126 g Photobook assist indicator .......................235
P Film format ....................................................186 h DPOF print indicator ...................................237
Q Film simulation ............................................130 i Rating..............................................................230
R Dynamic range ............................................138 j Voice memo ..................................................229
S HDR ..................................................................118 k Gift image .........................................................59214

The Playback Display

The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the displayof indicators during playback.

Standard

Information off

2022.12.31 1/999
1/999
12/31/2022

Playback and the Playback Menu

12/31/2022 1/999

NEXT

Info display

7215

The Playback Display

Viewing Photo Information
The photo information display changes eachtime the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up.

Basic data

Info display 1

2022.12.31 1/999
1/999
12/31/2022

Playback and the Playback Menu

7

12/31/2022 1/999

NEXT

LENS
FOCAL LENGTH
COLOR SPACELENS MODULATION OPT.

S.S

F

23.0mmF5.6
23.0mm
sRGB
ON

1/999
12/31/2022 12:10 AM

ISO
BACK

Info display 3

NEXT

Info display 2

Zooming in on the Focus Point
Press the center of the focus stick (focus lever) to zoom in on the focus
point. Press again to return to full-frame playback.

216

Viewing Pictures
Read this section for information on playback zoom andmulti-frame playback.
Use the rear command dial to go fromfull-frame playback to playback zoom or
multi-frame playback.

Full-frame playback

Playbackzoom

Multi-frame
playback
DISP/BACKMENU/OK
Nine-frame view

Medium zoom

Playback and the Playback Menu

100-0001

7

Hundred- frame view

Maximum zoom

217

Viewing Pictures

Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current
picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK or MENU/OK.

N The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGEQUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE.

ScrollWhen the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick(focus lever) can be used to view areas of theimage not currently visible in the display.
Playback and the Playback Menu

7

Navigation window

Multi-Frame Playback
To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear command dial left when a picture is displayed full frame.

N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK
to view the highlighted image full frame.
• In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or
down to view more pictures.

218

The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
The playback menu is displayed when
you press MENU/OK in playback mode.

PLAY BACK MENUSWITCH SLOTRAW CONVERSIONHEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSIONERASESIMULTANEOUS DELETECROPRESIZEPROTECTEXIT

N If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button to choose a card for playback.

Playback and the Playback Menu

SWITCH SLOT
Choose the card from which images will be played back.

7

219

RAW CONVERSION
Even if you don’t have a computer, you can use the camera tomodify RAW pictures and save them in other formats.
Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format

1 Display a RAW picture.
2 Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu.
3 Press MENU/OK.
RAW CONVERSION

A list of settings will be displayed.

Playback and the Playback Menu

REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
FILE TYPEIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
PUSH/PULL PROCESSINGDYNAMIC RANGE
CREATECANCEL4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight asetting.
5 Press the focus stick right to display
options.

RAW CONVERSION
100%
200%
400%

7

6 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option.
7 Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings
list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 toadjust additional settings.

8 Press the Q button.

A preview of the copy will be displayed.

9 Press MENU/OK.

The copy will be saved.

N RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q button when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback.

220

The Playback Menu

The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures fromRAW to another format are:Setting

O Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosenwhen the picture was taken.

221

Playback and the Playback Menu

Description
Create a copy using the settings in eﬀect at the time
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
the photo was taken.
FILE TYPE
Choose a ﬁle format.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose an image size.
IMAGE QUALITY
Adjust image quality.
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING Adjust exposure.
DYNAMIC RANGE
Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast.
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows
D RANGE PRIORITY
for natural-looking results when photographinghigh-contrast scenes.
FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the eﬀects of diﬀerent types of ﬁlm.
Choose a monochrome tint for photographs takMONOCHROMATIC COLOR en using FILM SIMULATION > a ACROS andb MONOCHROME.
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a ﬁlm grain eﬀect.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds,
yellows, and greens.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
blues.
WHITE BALANCE
Adjust white balance.
WB SHIFT
Fine-tune white balance.
TONE CURVE
Adjust highlights and shadows.
COLOR
Adjust color density.
SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
HIGH ISO NR
Process the copy to reduce mottling.
CLARITY
Increase deﬁnition.
Improve deﬁnition by adjusting for diﬀraction and
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
COLOR SPACE
Choose the color space used for color reproduction.
HDR MODE
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows.

7

HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF.
SELECT IMAGES
Select HEIF pictures for conversion.
FILE FORMAT
Choose a format for the converted pictures.

Playback and the Playback Menu

Options
TIFF 8bit

JPEG

TIFF 16bit

SELECT SLOT TO RECORD
Choose the memory card to which the converted pictures will
be saved.
Options
SLOT 1

7222

SLOT 2

The Playback Menu

ERASE
Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pictures.

O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures orcopy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
OptionFRAME
SELECTED FRAMESALL FRAMES

Description
Delete pictures one at a time.
Delete multiple selected pictures.
Delete all unprotected pictures.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll throughpictures and press MENU/OK to delete.

N • A confirmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; besure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK.
• Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the focus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK todelete.

Playback and the Playback Menu

FRAME
1 Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu.

7

223

SELECTED FRAMES
1 Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.

2 Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select.

• Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R).
• To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again.

3 When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display aconfirmation dialog.

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected picPlayback and the Playback Menu

7

tures.

N Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S.
ALL FRAMES
1 Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.

2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK andpress MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures.

N • Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted
before the button was pressed cannot be recovered.
• If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a
DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures.

224

The Playback Menu

SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
Taking photos with SEPARATE selected for D SAVE DATASET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING creates two copies. Choose
whether deleting the RAW image will also delete the JPEG or
HEIF copy.
OptionON
OFF

Description
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 also deletes the
JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 does not delete
the JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.

1 Display the desired picture.
2 Select CROP in the playback menu.
3 Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press thefocus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the
picture until the desired portion is displayed.

4 Press MENU/OK to display a confirmation dialog.
5 Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate
file.

N • The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in thecropped copy.
• If the size of the final copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow.
• All copies have an aspect ratio of 3∶2.

225

Playback and the Playback Menu

CROP
Create a cropped copy of the current picture.

7

RESIZE
Create a small copy of the current picture.

1 Display the desired picture.
2 Select RESIZE in the playback menu.
3 Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a confirmation
dialog.

4 Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate
file.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N The sizes available vary with the size of the original image.

7

226

The Playback Menu

PROTECT
Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of thefollowing options and press MENU/OK.
OptionFRAME
SET ALLRESET ALL

Description
Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete.
Protect all pictures.
Remove protection from all pictures.

during playback.

Playback and the Playback Menu

O Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.
N • Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smartphones or tablets removes upload marking.
• Protection can also be added or removed by pressing the Fn1 button

7227

IMAGE ROTATE
Rotate pictures.

1 Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB.
2 Display the desired picture.
3 Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu.
4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture
90° clockwise, up to rotate it 90° counterclockwise.

Playback and the Playback Menu

5 Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in
the selected orientation whenever it is played back on thecamera.

N • Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before rotating pictures.
• The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with otherdevices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated whenviewed on a computer or on other cameras.
• Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB are automatically displayed in the correct orientation during playback.

7

228

The Playback Menu

VOICE MEMO SETTING
Add a voice memo to the current photograph.

1 Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu.
2 Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo.
3 Press and hold the AFON button to record a voice memo.
Recording ends after 30 s or when you release the button.

Playing Voice Memos
Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback.
• To play the memo, press the AFON button.
• A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back.
• Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and thenpressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume.
Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos.
• Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures.
• Deleting the picture also deletes the memo.

7229

RATING
Rate pictures using stars.

1 Select RATING in the playback menu.
2 Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and therear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars(“I”).

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • The focus stick (focus lever) can be used in place of the front command dial to choose a picture.
• The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AEL button insingle-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback.

• Use touch controls to zoom in or out.
• Ratings cannot be applied to:- Protected pictures- Movies- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)

7230

The Playback Menu

COPY
Copy pictures between the cards in the first and second slots.

1 Select COPY in the playback menu.
2 Highlight one of the following options.
OptionDescription
Copy pictures from the card in the ﬁrst slot to the card in
SLOT1 y SLOT2
the second slot.
Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the card
SLOT2 y SLOT1
in the ﬁrst slot.

OptionFRAME
ALL FRAMES

Description
Copy selected pictures. Press the focus stick left or right toview pictures and press MENU/OK to copy the current picture.
Copy all pictures.

O • Copying ends when the destination is full.
• If you attempt to copy a file over 4 GB in size to a memory card witha capacity of 32 GB or less, copying will end and the file will not be
copied.

231

Playback and the Playback Menu

3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) right.
4 Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK.

7

TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE
Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth.

N For information on pairing the camera with a smartphone or tablet, visit:https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/

1 Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE &TRANSFER.

N Select RESET to remove “upload to smartphone” marking from all
pictures before proceeding.

Playback and the Playback Menu

7

2 Mark pictures for upload.

Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
• To switch to the memory card in theother slot or display only picturesthat meet selected criteria, press
DISP/BACK before marking begins.
• To select all pictures, press the Q button.
• Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.

3 Press DISP/BACK and select START

TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be uploaded.

232

SELECT IMAGE
FRAME

SELECT ALL

SELECT RANGE

SELECT

FINISH/SETTINGSELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGSWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOTFINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFERThe Playback Menu

Filtering Pictures/Choosing a SlotTo switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures thatmeet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
• To display only pictures that meet selected cri- SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
teria, choose FILTERING.
START TRANSFERFILTERING• To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONSO Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing upN • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.
• The following cannot be selected for upload:- Protected pictures- Movies- RAW images- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)• If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF

and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device willcontinue even while the camera is off.
• When a SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > a ISO BUTTON SETTING, the picture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the ISO button.

233

Playback and the Playback Menu

load marking.

7

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest apps. The smartphone
can then be used to:• Control the camera and take pictures remotely• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures• Upload location data to the camera

Playback and the Playback Menu

7

N • For downloads and other information, visit:https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/• If r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > a ISO BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to thesmartphone using the ISO button.

SLIDE SHOW
View pictures in an automated slide show. Press MENU/OK to startand press the focus stick (focus lever) right or left to skip aheador back. Press DISP/BACK at any time during the show to view onscreen help. The show can be ended at any time by pressing
MENU/OK.

N The camera will not turn off automatically while a slide show is in progress.

234

The Playback Menu

PHOTOBOOK ASSISTCreate books from your favorite photos.
Creating a Photobook
1 Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU > PHOTOBOOKASSIST.

2 Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus le-ver) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when thebook is complete.

cus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead.

3 Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to se-lect all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The newbook will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu.

N • Books can contain up to 300 pictures.
• Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected
for photobooks.
• The first picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the fo-

7235Viewing Photobooks
Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK
to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to scroll through the pictures.

Playback and the Playback Menu

Editing and Deleting Photobooks
Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options
will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the onscreen instructions.
• EDIT: Edit the book as described in “Creating a Photobook”.
• ERASE: Delete the book.

7

236

The Playback Menu

PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
Create a digital “print order” for DPOF-compatible printers.

1 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > PRINT ORDER (DPOF).
2 Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pic-tures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or
RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before
proceeding.

3 Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the
4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up

or down to choose the number ofcopies (up to 99).

N To remove a picture from the order,press the focus stick down until thenumber of copies is 0.

PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
DPOF: 00001

01 SHEETS
FRAME

SET

Total numberof prints
Number of copies

Playback and the Playback Menu

print order.

7

N Repeat steps 3–4 to complete the print order.
5 The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press
MENU/OK to exit.

N • The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon
during playback.
• Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single
memory card.

• If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as
described above.

237

instax PRINTER PRINT
To print pictures to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE printers, first
select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/
USB settings menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name
(SSID) and password, then follow the steps below.

1 Turn the printer on.
2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax

PRINTER PRINT. The camera will connect to the printer.

Playback and the Playback Menu

7

PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
CONNECTING
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234

CANCEL

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) todisplay the picture you want to print,then press MENU/OK. The picture will
be sent to the printer and printing
will start.

PRINTER PRINT
100-0020

SET
instax-12345678

CANCELN • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.

• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.

238

The Playback Menu

DISP ASPECT
Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on
High Definition (HD) devices (this option is available only when
an HDMI cable is connected).

Options
3:2

N Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 3 : 2 full screen.
The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms
cropped out.

Playback and the Playback Menu

16 : 9

7

239

MEMO

240

Network/USB Setting Menus

241

Network/USB Setting Menus
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
For more information on the network/USB settings menu, visit:https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/

Network/USB Setting Menus

8242

The Setup Menus

243

USER SETTING
Adjust basic camera settings.
To access basic camera settings, press
MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, andchoose USER SETTING.

USER SETTINGFORMATbAREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
TIME DIFFERENCE
ax MY MENU SETTINGF MY MENU SETTINGSENSOR CLEANINGEXITFORMAT
To format a memory card:

1 Select D USER SETTING > FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab.
2 Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format andpress MENU/OK.

3 A confirmation dialog will be dis-played. To format the memory card,
highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

The Setup Menus

9

N To exit without formatting the memory

FORMAT
FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK?
ERASE ALL DATAOKCANCELcard, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK.

O • All data—including protected pictures—will be deleted from thememory card. Be sure important files have been copied to a computer or other storage device.
• Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting.

N Format options can also be displayed by holding the selector down(f) while pressing the b (delete) button.

244

USER SETTINGb AREA SETTING
Adjust settings for your current time zone.
AREA SETTING
Choose your time zone from a map.
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
OptionON
OFF

Description
Daylight saving time on.
Daylight saving time oﬀ.

DATE/TIME
To set the camera clock:1 Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab.
2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the

3 Press MENU/OK to set the clock.

The Setup Menus

year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down tochange. To change the order in which the year, month, andday are displayed, highlight the date format and press thefocus stick up or down.

9245

TIME DIFFERENCE
Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone tothe local time at your destination when traveling. To specify thedifference between your local and home time zone:

O Use b AREA SETTING to choose your home time zone before selecting a local time zone using g LOCAL.

1 Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK.
2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the local timezone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete.

N Select ON to enable daylight saving time.
To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL andpress MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home timezone, select h HOME.
Optionsg LOCALh HOMEThe Setup Menus

N If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about threeseconds when the camera is turned on.

9246

USER SETTING

Qa
Choose a language.
x MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 287).
F MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 287).

The Setup Menus

9247

SENSOR CLEANING
Remove dust from the camera image sensor.
OptionOK

Description
Clean the sensor immediately.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is
WHEN SWITCHED ON
turned on.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns
WHEN SWITCHED OFF oﬀ (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the camera turns oﬀ in playback mode).

N Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed
using a blower (P 356).

BATTERY AGE
Check battery age. Age is expressed as anumber between 0 and 4. The higher thenumber, the older the battery.

BATTERY AGE

The Setup Menus

N The older the battery, the faster it loses its charge. We recommend thatbatteries be replaced as they wear out.

9248

USER SETTINGRESETReset shooting or setup menu options to default values.

1 Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
OptionDescription
Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white
STILL MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all movie menu settings other than custom white
MOVIE MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME,
SET-UP RESET b AREA SETTING, TIME DIFFERENCE, and
COPYRIGHT INFO to default values.
Reset all settings other than custom white balance to
INITIALIZE
default values.

2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK andpress MENU/OK.

The Setup Menus

REGULATORY
To view electronic copies of the product model number, andother certificates, select D USER SETTING > REGULATORY in the
setup menu.

9249

SOUND SETTING
Make changes to camera sounds.
To access sound settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SOUND SET-UP.

SOUND SETTING

AF BEEP VOL.
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
OPERATION VOL.
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUNDsELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUMEsELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUNDPLAYBACK VOLUMEEXIT

AF BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera
focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)

SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer
is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
The Setup Menus

Optionsb (high)9250

c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)

SOUND SETTINGOPERATION VOL.
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera controls are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical orelectronic front-curtain shutter.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the mechanical or electronic
front-curtain shutter.
i SOUND 1

Options
j SOUND 2

k SOUND 3
The Setup Menus

9251s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic
shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter.
Options
j SOUND 2i SOUND 1

k SOUND 3

PLAYBACK VOLUME
Adjust the volume for movie playback.
0

The Setup Menus

9

252

1

2

3

4

Options
5

6

7

8

9

10

SOUND SETTING

4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch movies.
OptionDescription

XLR

The camera plays audio recorded via external microphones connected via the XLR microphone adapter.

CAMERAThe camera plays audio recorded via the camera’s built-in
microphone or external microphones connected via themicrophone jack.

N You can also switch sources while viewing the playback display bypressing the center of the focus stick (focus lever).

The Setup Menus

9253

SCREEN SETTING
Make changes to display settings.
To access display settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SCREEN SET-UP.

SCREEN SETTING

VIEW MODE SETTINGEVF BRIGHTNESSEVF COLOREVF COLOR ADJUSTMENTLCD BRIGHTNESSLCD COLORLCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE DISP.
EXIT

VIEW MODE SETTING
Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic viewfinder), or LCD
monitor view modes (P 18).
EVF BRIGHTNESS
Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
OptionAUTO
The Setup Menus

9

MANUAL

Description
The camera automatically adjusts brightness around a selectedlevel in response to changes in ambient lighting conditions.
Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between −7
and +5.

EVF COLOR
Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
−5

254

−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

SCREEN SETTINGEVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the electronic viewfinder.

1 Adjust colors using the focus stick

EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT(focus lever).

SETCANCEL2 Press MENU/OK.

The Setup Menus

9255

LCD BRIGHTNESS
Adjust monitor brightness.
−5

−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

LCD COLOR
Adjust monitor saturation.
−5

−4

−3

−2

−1

LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor.

1 Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever).
2 Press MENU/OK.

The Setup Menus

9256

SCREEN SETTINGIMAGE DISP.
Choose how long images are displayed after shooting.
OptionCONTINUOUS
1.5 SEC
0.5 SECOFF

Description
Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the
shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus
point, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever); press again
to cancel zoom.
Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
Pictures are not displayed after shooting.

N • Colors may differ slightly from those in the final image.
• “Noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities.
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
Choose whether the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor
rotate to match camera orientation.
OptionsON

OFF
The Setup Menus

9257

PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview
in manual exposure mode.
OptionDescription
PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview.
Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in
PREVIEW WB which exposure is likely to change during shooting, as may be
the case when you use a ﬂash during daylight.
Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this option in situations in which both exposure and white balanceOFF
are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when
you use a ﬂash with an incandescent monitoring lamp.

NATURAL LIVE VIEW
Choose whether the effects of film simulation, white balance,and other settings are visible in the monitor.
OptionThe Setup Menus

ON

OFF

9

258

Description
The eﬀects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor,
but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hardto-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will diﬀer fromthose in the ﬁnal picture. The display will however be adjusted
to show the eﬀects of monochrome and sepia settings.
The eﬀects of ﬁlm simulation, white balance, and other settings
can be previewed in the monitor.

SCREEN SETTING

F-Log VIEW ASSIST
Select ON to display a tone-corrected preview (equivalent toBT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies.
Options
ON

OFF

ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual
horizon display (P 25).

The Setup Menus

9259

FRAMING GUIDELINE
Choose a framing grid for shooting mode.
OptionG GRID 24

F GRID 9

DisplayP

For “rule of thirds” composition.

P

H HD FRAMINGP

A six-by-four grid.

Frame HD pictures in thecrop shown by the lines at
the top and bottom of thedisplay.

N Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayedusing D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 23).

The Setup Menus

9260

SCREEN SETTINGAUTOROTATE PB
Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation)
pictures during playback.
Options
ON

OFF

FOCUS SCALE UNITS
Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator.
Options
METERSFEETAPERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS
Choose whether the camera displays aperture as a T-number(used for movie camera lenses) or an f/-number (used for stillcamera lenses) when an optional FUJINON MKX-series lens is
attached. For information on using cinema lenses, see the documentation provided with the lens.
OptionF NUMBER

261

The Setup Menus

T NUMBER

Description
A measure of lens aperture commonly used by cinematographers. Lens transmittance is taken into account to better calculate exposure.
A measure of lens aperture commonly used by photographers.
Lens transmittance is assumed to be 100%, meaning that thesame aperture may produce diﬀerent exposures depending on
the lens.

9

DUAL DISPLAY SETTING
Choose the content of the two windows in the dual display.
OptionDescription
The right (small) window shows a close-up of the focus area,
R:FOCUS L:FRAME
while the left (large) window shows the entire frame.
The right (small) window shows the entire frame, while the left
R:FRAME L:FOCUS(large) window shows a close-up of the focus area.

DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display(P 23).

The Setup Menus

9262

SCREEN SETTINGLARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic viewfinder. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN
SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.

OFF

ON

O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 15).

N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, thebutton can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)and off (OFF) (P 295).

The Setup Menus

LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.

9
OFF

ON

O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 17).

N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, thebutton can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)and off (OFF) (P 295).

263

LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed when
ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP >LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD).

LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING

Expo. DISP.
Scale
L1
L2
L3
L4
R1
R2

OptionA Expo. DISP.
B d Scale
C L1, L2, L3, L4
D R1, R2, R3, R4

Description
Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display.
Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to
deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK.
Select ON to display the exposure indicator.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the left sideof the screen.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the rightside of the screen.

INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
Adjust display contrast.
The Setup Menus

OptionDescription
HIGH CONTRAST
High contrast.
STANDARD
Normal contrast.
LOW CONTRAST
Low contrast.
DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting.

9264

SCREEN SETTINGLOCATION INFO
Select ON to display location info downloaded from a smartphone.
Options
ON

OFF

SUB MONITOR SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed in the secondary LCD monitor.
Separate displays are available for still photography and movie
recording.

1 Select D SCREEN SET-UP > SUB MONITOR SETTING in the
setup menu.

2 Highlight STILL MODE or MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.
3 Highlight the indicator you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
SUB MONITOR SETTING(STILL)SHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
EXPO. COMP.

The Setup MenusISO
SHOOTING MODE
IMAGE SIZE
WHITE BALANCEFILM SIMULATION

9265

4 Highlight the indicator you wish todisplay and press MENU/OK.

Choose from:• SHUTTER SPEED• APERTURE• EXPO. COMP.
• ISO• MOVIE MODE
• FRAMES REM.
• REC. TIME
• SHOOTING MODE
• PHOTOMETRY• DRIVE MODE
• FOCUS MODEDISPLAY 1 SETTINGSHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
EXPO. COMP.
ISO
MOVIE MODE
FRAMES REM.
REC. TIMENONE• WHITE BALANCE• IMAGE SIZE• IMAGE QUALITY• BATTERY LEVEL• CARD SLOT OPTIONS• SHUTTER TYPE
• FILM SIMULATION• DYNAMIC RANGE• CONNECTION STATUS• NONE

5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to change additional indicators.
The Setup Menus

SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR
Adjusting the background color of the secondary LCD monitor
according to lighting conditions makes the display easier to read.
Option
BLACK
WHITE

9

Description
Recommended for use with dark ambient lighting.
Recommended for use with bright ambient lighting.

N The background is displayed in white when the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on.

266

SCREEN SETTINGx Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it isdisplayed during still photography.
Options
TRANSPARENTBLACK

F Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it isdisplayed during movie recording.
Options
TRANSPARENTBLACK

The Setup Menus

9267

BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
Access options for camera controls.
To access control options, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING.

BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

FOCUS LEVER SETTING
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUFUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTINGSELECTOR BUTTON SETTINGCOMMAND DIAL SETTINGo S.S OPERATION
EXIT

FOCUS LEVER SETTING
Choose the functions performed by pressing the center of the
focus stick (focus lever) or by pressing the stick up, down, left, orright.
PUSH
OptionOFF

The Setup Menus

9

Description
Pressing the center of the stick has no eﬀect.
Press the center of the stick to choose the focus area size.
If g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECTEDIT FOCUS AREA
DETECTION SETTING is on, you can instead position thefocus frame over the desired face, eye, animal, or object.
Press the center of the stick to zoom in on the active focus
ZOOM
area (P 99).
RESET TO CENTER Press the center of the stick to select the center focus area.

TILT oOptionOFF
DIRECT AF POINT
SELECTIONEDIT FOCUS AREA

268

Description
Pressing the stick up, down, left, or right has no eﬀect.
Choose the focus area without leaving the shooting display.
Press the stick up, down, left, or right to view a focus-areadisplay and choose the focus area.

BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still photography (P 289).
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when filming
movies (P 289).
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons (P 295).
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons available onsome power zoom lenses (P 304).
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING
Choose the roles played by the up, down, left, and right buttons
on the selector.
Description
The selector buttons serve as function buttons.
The selector buttons can be used to position the focus area.

N Selecting FOCUS AREA prevents you accessing the functions assigned
to the function buttons.

The Setup Menus

OptionFn BUTTON
FOCUS AREA

9269

COMMAND DIAL SETTING
Choose whether to reverse the roles played by the front and rearcommand dials in each of the following modes.
OptionP
SAM

Description
Reverse the dials used for program shift and exposure compensation in mode P (program AE).
Reverse the dials used for shutter-speed selection and exposurecompensation in mode S (shutter-priority AE).
Reverse the dials used for aperture selection and exposurecompensation in mode A (aperture-priority AE).
Reverse the dials used for shutter-speed and aperture selection
in mode M (manual).

o S.S OPERATION
Select OFF to disable shutter-speed fine-tuning using the command dials.
OptionsON
The Setup Menus

9

OFF

COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
Choose the direction in which the command dials are rotated tochoose values. Settings for the front and rear command dials canbe adjusted separately.
Option- ––––– ++ ––––– -270

Description
Rotate the dial right for higher values or to move to the next
item.
Rotate the dial left for higher values or to move to the next item.

BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGSHUTTER AF
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button ispressed halfway.
OptionDescription

AF-S• ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

• ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed
AF-C

halfway.

• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

SHUTTER AE
If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button ispressed halfway. The setting for focus mode CONTINUOUS AF(AF-C) can be adjusted separately from that for modes SINGLE
AF (AF-S) and MANUAL FOCUS.
OptionsONOFFtaken in burst mode.

SHOOT WITHOUT LENS
Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is attached.
Options
ON

OFF

271

The Setup Menus

N Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot9

SHOOT WITHOUT CARD
Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory
card inserted in the camera.
OptionON
OFF

Description
When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released totest camera function and the shooting and setup menus can bedisplayed.
The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing
accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card.

LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING
Adjust settings for compatible lenses with focus rings or power zoom.
FOCUS RING ROTATE
Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to increase the focus distance.
Options
X CW (clockwise)
The Setup Menus

9

Y CCW (counterclockwise)

FOCUS RING OPERATION
Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the movement of the focus ring.
OptionDescription
NONLINEAR Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated.
Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is rotated,
LINEARbut the focusing speed is unaﬀected by the speed the ring is rotated.

F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (Fn)Choose the rate at which the focus distance changes when adjusted using function buttons during manual focus with compatible
power zoom lenses. The higher the number, the higher the rate.
Options1(SLOW)

272

2

3

4

5

6

7

8(FAST)BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGCONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn)Choose the rate at which compatible power zoom lenses can bezoomed in or out using function buttons. The higher the number, thehigher the rate.
Options1(SLOW)

2

3

4

5

6

7

8(FAST)

CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM/FOCUS (Fn) OPERATION
Choose whether the function buttons on compatible powerzoom lenses need only be pressed once to start and stop power
focus or power zoom.
OptionSTART/STOPSWITCH
ACTIVE WHILE
PRESSING

Description
The operation starts when the button is pressed and stops when
it is pressed a second time.
The operation continues while the button is pressed and stops
when the button is released.

Options
X CW (clockwise)Y CCW (counterclockwise)

ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
Choose role played by the zoom/focus control ring on compatible power zoom lenses.
Options
ZOOM

FOCUS

273

The Setup Menus

ZOOM RING ROTATE
Choose whether to reverse the rotation of the zoom ring on compatible power zoom lenses.

9

AE/AF-LOCK MODE
This option determines the behavior of the button to which
exposure and/or focus lock is assigned.
OptionDescription
AE&AF ON WHEN
Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed.
PRESSING
AE&AF ON/OFF Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and remain locked until it is pressed again.
SWITCHAWB-LOCK MODE
Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto whitebalance (AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock whitebalance at the value metered by the camera when WA WHITEPRIORITY, AUTO, or AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY is selected forwhite balance.

The Setup Menus

OptionDescription
AWB ON WHEN
Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed.
PRESSINGAWB ON/OFF Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end
the lock.
SWITCH

9274

BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGa ISO BUTTON SETTING
Choose the role performed by the ISO button during playback.
OptionDescription
Pressing the button displays a dialog where pictures can beselected for upload to a smartphone with which the camera
a SMARTPHONE
is paired (P 232). If the camera is not currently paired with
TRANSFER ORDER
a smartphone, Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING options
will be displayed instead.
Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to anb FTP
TRANSFER ORDER FTP server.
Pressing the button marks the current picture for priority uploadc FTP PRIORITY
to an FTP server. The picture will be moved to the head of the
TRANSFER ORDER
upload queue.
r WIRELESSThe button can be used for wireless connections.
COMMUNICATIONN b FTP TRANSFER ORDER and c FTP PRIORITY TRANSFER

ORDER can only be used when an optional FT-XH file transmitter isconnected.
The Setup Menus

9275

TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Enable or disable touch-screen controls.
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
OptionON
OFF

Description
The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting.
Touch controls disabled.

x DOUBLE TAP SETTING
OptionON
OFF

Description
Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during
shooting.
Touch zoom disabled.

c TOUCH FUNCTION
OptionON
OFF

Description
Enable touch-function gestures.
Disable touch-function gestures.

The Setup Menus

TOUCH ZOOM
Option
ON
OFF

9

276

Description
If the lens supports touch zoom, you can zoom in and out by
touching the LCD monitor (P 35).
Touch zoom disabled.

BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGa TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
OptionON
OFF

Description
The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback.
Touch controls disabled.

EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls whilethe viewfinder is active. The area used for touch controls can beselected from:
Option
6
0
2
4
1
3
5
OFF

Description
All.
Right half.
Top right quarter.
Bottom right quarter.
Left half.
Top left quarter.
Bottom left quarter.
Touch controls disabled.
The Setup Menus

9277

BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGLOCK
Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation.
OptionDescription
Choose from the following:• UNLOCK: Reset lock options.
ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTIONLOCK SETTING •SELECTION list.
• SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in
the FUNCTION SELECTION list.
FUNCTION
SELECTION

Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION ischosen for LOCK SETTING.

N The controls selected using SELECTED FUNCTION can be locked at any

time during shooting by pressing and holding MENU/OK. To unlock thecontrols, press and hold the button again.

The Setup Menus

9278

POWER MANAGEMENT
Adjust power management settings.
To access power management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,and choose POWER MANAGEMENT.

POWER MANAGEMENTAUTO POWER OFFPERFORMANCEEVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

EXIT

AUTO POWER OFF
Choose the length of time before the camera turns off automatically when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase
battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned off
manually.
Options
5 MIN

2 MIN

1 MIN

30 SEC

15 SECOFF

OptionBOOSTNORMALECONOMYDescription
Boost camera focus and viewﬁnder display performance.
The battery drains faster than when is NORMAL selected.
Choose for standard focus and viewﬁnder display performance and battery endurance.
Limit autofocus and viewﬁnder performance. This option
oﬀers better battery endurance than does NORMAL.

279

The Setup Menus

PERFORMANCE
Select BOOST to improve focus and viewfinder display performance.

9

POWER MANAGEMENT

EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
Adjust the behavior of the EVF and LCD monitor when BOOST is
selected for PERFORMANCE.
Option
EVF/LCD LOW LIGHT
PRIORITYEVF/LCD RESOLUTIONPRIORITYEVF FRAME RATEPRIORITY (120P)

Description
Display brightness is adjusted to make subjects in shadows easier to see. Motion blur may cause ghosting.
Display resolution is increased to make details easier tosee.
The refresh rate for the EVF is increased, smoothing motion.
The refresh rate for the EVF is increased beyond EVF
EVF FRAME RATEFRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) smoothing motion
PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.)
still further. The EVF may darken.

AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
If its temperature rises beyond a certain point, the camera will firstdisplay a message and then, if the temperature rise continues, automatically end shooting and power down. Choose the temperature
at which the camera turns off automatically.
The Setup Menus

OptionSTANDARD

9

HIGH

280

Description
The camera turns oﬀ automatically when its temperaturereaches the STANDARD value.
Shooting can continue at temperatures higher thanthe STANDARD value, extending the time available torecord movies and the like. Because remaining in contact
with the camera at these high temperatures could resultin low-temperature burns, this option should only be
used after mounting the camera on a tripod or taking
other steps to avoid prolonged contact with the camera.

SAVE DATA SETTING
Make changes to file management settings.
To access file management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP.

SAVE DATA SETTINGFRAME NO.
EDIT FILE NAMExCARD SLOT SETTINGSELECT SLOT(x SEQUENTIAL)
SELECT FOLDERCOPYRIGHT INFODEFAULT CAPTIONGEOTAGGINGEXIT

FRAME NO.
Frame number
New pictures are stored in image files named
using a four-digit file number assigned byadding one to the last file number used. The
Filefile number is displayed during playback as Directory
number number
shown. FRAME NO. controls whether file numbering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or
the current memory card is formatted.
OptionRENEW

N • If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will bedisabled. Turn the camera off and insert a formatted memory card
before resuming shooting.
• Selecting D USER SETTING > RESET sets FRAME NO. to
CONTINUOUS but does not reset the file number.
• Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may differ.

281

The Setup Menus

CONTINUOUS

Description
Numbering continues from the last ﬁle number used or the ﬁrst
available ﬁle number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to
reduce the number of pictures with duplicate ﬁle names.
Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a newmemory card is inserted.

9

EDIT FILE NAME
Change the file name prefix. sRGB images use a four-letter prefix(default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefix (“DSF”)
preceded by an underscore.
OptionsRGB
AdobeRGB

Default prefix
DSCF
_DSF

Sample file name
ABCD0001_ABC0001

x CARD SLOT SETTING
Choose the role played by the card in the second slot.
OptionSEQUENTIALBACKUPSEPARATE

Description
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in theﬁrst slot is full.
Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
RAW pictures will be saved to the card in the ﬁrst slot and JPEG
or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This option only
takes eﬀect when FINE+RAW or NORMAL+RAW is selectedfor H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE QUALITY.

The Setup Menus

SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
Choose the card that is recorded to first when SEQUENTIAL is
selected for x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Options
SLOT 19282

SLOT 2

SAVE DATA SETTINGSELECT FOLDER
Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent
pictures.
OptionSELECT FOLDER

CREATE FOLDER

Description
To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be
stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down tohighlight an existing folder and press MENU/OK.
Enter a ﬁve-character folder name. The new folder will becreated with the next picture you take and subsequent
pictures will be stored in that folder.

COPYRIGHT INFO
Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to
new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information
are reflected only in images taken after the changes are made.

The Setup Menus

OptionDescription
DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information.
ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO Enter the creator’s name.
ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder.
Delete the current copyright information. This change applies
DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO only to images taken after this option is selected; copyrightinformation recorded with existing images is not aﬀected.

9283

SAVE DATA SETTINGDEFAULT CAPTION
Choose the caption applied to new photos and movies.
DISPLAY
View the current caption.
EDIT
Enter a caption.
ERASE
Delete the current caption.
GEOTAGGING
If ON is selected, location data downloaded from a smartphone
will be embedded in pictures as they are taken.
OptionsON

The Setup Menus

9

284

OFF

Shortcuts

285

Shortcut Options
Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation.
Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a custom “my” menu or assigned to a function button or touch-function gesture for direct access:
Shortcut Option

Description
Add frequently-used options to this custom menu,“My menu”
which can be viewed by pressing MENU/OK and selecting the E (“MY MENU”) tab.
The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button.
The Quick Menu Use the Q menu to view or change the options selected for frequently-used menu items.
Use the function buttons for direct access to selectThe function buttons
ed features.
Use touch function button ﬂick gestures (T-Fn1,
Touch-function
T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access to selectedgesturesfeatures.
Use the function buttons on the lens (if any) for diLens function buttons
rect access to selected features.

Shortcuts

10

286

P
287

289
295
301
304

MY MENU
Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options.
To display “my menu”, press MENU/OK in theshooting display and select the E (MYMENU) tab.

MY MENU

SELF-TIMER
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTINGFILM SIMULATIONGRAIN EFFECT
PHOTOMETRYSHUTTER TYPEIS MODEgFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTINGEXITO The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to
MY MENU.
MY MENU SETTING
To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:

1 In the setup menu, select D USERSETTING > x MY MENU SETTING or
F MY MENU SETTING.

MY MENU SETTINGADD ITEMSRANK ITEMSREMOVE ITEMSN To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS.
To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up

SELECTCANCELN Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks.

Shortcutsor down to highlight ADD ITEMS andpress MENU/OK. Options that can be
added to “my menu” are highlighted
in blue.

MY MENU SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECT

10

287

MY MENU

3 Choose a position for the item andpress MENU/OK. The item will be added
to “my menu”.

SELECT ITEM LOCATION

1 IMAGE SIZE
2 IMAGE QUALITY

MOVE

SAVE

4 Press MENU/OK to return to the edit display.
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired items have been
added.

N “My menu” can contain up to 16 items.

Shortcuts

10288

The Quick Menu
Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. Toview the quick menu, press the Q button.
The Quick Menu Display
The quick menu offers different options in photo and movie
modes. At default settings, it contains the following items:
Still photography

SHOOTING MODESETF IMAGE SIZEG IMAGE QUALITY
H FILM SIMULATION

Default
I HIGHLIGHT TONEJ SHADOW TONEK COLORL SHARPNESSM SELF-TIMER
g FACE/EYE DETECTIONN
SETTINGO SUBJECT DETECTION SETTINGP EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESSThe quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–P, which can be changed.

289

Shortcuts

A SHOOTING MODE
B FOCUS MODE
C AF MODED DYNAMIC RANGEE HIGH ISO NR

LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

10

Movie recording

SHOOTING MODE

SETLONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

Default
E APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZEDCONTROL oL)
B SHUTTER SPEEDF F ISO
C MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/G MOVIE MODE FRAME RATEASPECT RATIO
D F WHITE BALANCE
H F WHITE BALANCE COLOR
TEMP. (WHEN k SELECTED)A SHOOTING MODE

The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–H, which can be changed.
Shortcuts

10290The Quick Menu

Viewing and Changing Settings
1 Press Q to display the quick menu
during shooting.

2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to

SHOOTING MODE

highlight items and rotate the rearcommand dial to change.

SET

LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

N To jump to the x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button
when the quick menu is displayed.

can assign the Q button roles normally reserved for the function
buttons or assign the Q button’s default role to a function button(P 295).
• To disable the Q (quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING > Q BUTTON SETTING.

291

Shortcuts

3 Press Q to exit when settings are complete.
N • The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls.
• Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you

10Editing the Quick Menu
To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:

1 Press and hold the Q button during
shooting.

N The camera displays the photo quick menu during still photography and the movie quick menu when in movie mode.

2 The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick(focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change andpress MENU/OK.

3 Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
The following can be assigned to the quick menu.

N The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.

Shortcuts

10

292

The Quick Menu

Available Items (Still Photography)
Choose from:• IMAGE SIZE• IMAGE QUALITY• FILM SIMULATION• GRAIN EFFECT• COLOR CHROME EFFECT• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE• DYNAMIC RANGE• D RANGE PRIORITY• WHITE BALANCE• WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.

• MF ASSIST• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• SELF-TIMER• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION• ISO• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING• FLASH COMPENSATION• MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT• HIGHLIGHT TONE
• SHADOW TONE
• COLOR• SHARPNESS• CLARITY• HIGH ISO NR• FOCUS MODE
• AF MODE• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING• MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
• BIT RATE
• HIGH SPEED REC• F IS MODE
• F IS MODE BOOST• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL(WHEN k SELECTED)RATIO

ADJUSTMENT• EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS• EVF/LCD COLOR• NONEN To disable the function button, choose NONE.
Shortcuts

10

293The Quick Menu

Available Items (Movies)• FILM SIMULATION• DYNAMIC RANGE• F WHITE BALANCE• F WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHEN k SELECTED)• HIGHLIGHT TONE
• SHADOW TONE
• COLOR• SHARPNESS• HIGH ISO NR• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING• MF ASSIST• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• PHOTOMETRY• MOVIE ISO• MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT• MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
• BIT RATE
• HIGH SPEED REC• FOCUS MODE
• MOVIE AF MODE
• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION• F IS MODE
• F IS MODE BOOST• SHUTTER SPEED• APERTURE(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS• EVF/LCD COLOR• NONERATIO

N To disable the function button, choose NONE.

Shortcuts

10294

Function Controls
Assign a role to each function button or touch-function
gesture for quick access to the selected feature.
The Function Buttons
Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the selected feature.
Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:Back-of-Camera Function Buttons

Default
AF-ON
AE LOCK ONLYQUICK MENU

Shortcuts

Function buttons
A AFON button
B AEL (exposure lock) button
C Q (quick menu) button

10

295

Front-of-Camera Function Buttons

Shortcuts

Function buttons
A ISO button
B VIEW MODE button
C WB button
D t (movie recording) button
E Fn1 button
F Fn2 button
G Fn3 button

10

296

Default
ISO
VIEW MODE SETTING
WHITE BALANCE
MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
FOCUS MODE

Function Controls

The Selector

Function buttons
A Fn4 button
B Fn6 button
C Fn7 button
D Fn5 button

Default
PHOTOMETRYSHUTTER TYPEPERFORMANCEFILM SIMULATION

Shortcuts

10297

Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons
The roles played by the function buttons can be selected using
the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu.

Shortcuts

10• d WHEN SET TO B (ON/OFF SWITCH) • SHUTTER TYPE• IMAGE SIZE
• FLICKER REDUCTION• IMAGE QUALITY• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
• RAW
• ISO
• FILM SIMULATION• IS MODE• GRAIN EFFECT• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION• COLOR CHROME EFFECT• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• TTL-LOCK• DYNAMIC RANGE• MODELING FLASH• D RANGE PRIORITY• MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE• WHITE BALANCE• HIGH SPEED REC• CLARITY• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING• F IS MODE BOOST• FOCUS AREA
• ZEBRA SETTING• FOCUS CHECK• COOLING FAN SETTING• FOCUS MODE
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• AF MODE• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH• VIEW MODE SETTING• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF• EVF/LCD SWITCH• AF RANGE LIMITER• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD• FOCUS CHECK LOCK• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• PRE-SHOT sJ• HISTOGRAM• SELF-TIMER• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH• AE BKT SETTING• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• FOCUS BKT SETTING• F-Log VIEW ASSIST• PHOTOMETRY• COMMAND DIAL LOCK298

Function Controls• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)• AE LOCK ONLY
• AF LOCK ONLY
• AE/AF LOCK
• AF-ON• AWB LOCK ONLY
• LOCK SETTING• PERFORMANCE• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER• Bluetooth ON/OFF• QUICK MENU
• PLAYBACK• NONEN To disable the function button, choose NONE.

Shortcuts

10299

AF-ON
Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus.
MODELING FLASHIf MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mounted flash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fire theflash and check for shadows and the like (modeling flash).
TTL-LOCK
If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock flash
output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING >TTL-LOCK MODE (P 176).
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
Controls to which RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING has been assigned can be pressed to temporarily recall the settings saved toposition C1 (CUSTOM 1) on the mode dial. Pressing the button asecond time restores the previous settings.

Shortcuts

10300

Function Controls

Touch-Function Gestures
Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4)
for quick access to selected features.

N Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func-tion gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.

Touch-Function Gesture Defaults
The default assignments for the different gestures are:

Default
HISTOGRAMPREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELDLARGE INDICATORS MODEZEBRA SETTING

Shortcuts

Touch-Function Gestures
A T-Fn1 (flick up)
B T-Fn2 (flick left)
C T-Fn3 (flick right)
D T-Fn4 (flick down)

10

301

Assigning Roles to Touch-Function Gestures
The roles played by touch-function gestures can be selected using the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
option in the setup menu.

Shortcuts

10• IMAGE SIZE• IMAGE QUALITY• RAW• FILM SIMULATION• GRAIN EFFECT• COLOR CHROME EFFECT• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE• DYNAMIC RANGE• D RANGE PRIORITY• WHITE BALANCE• CLARITY• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK• FOCUS MODE
• AF MODE• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF• AF RANGE LIMITER• FOCUS CHECK LOCK• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• PRE-SHOT sJ• SELF-TIMER• AE BKT SETTING• FOCUS BKT SETTING• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION

302• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING• ISO• IS MODE• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING• TTL-LOCK• MODELING FLASH• HIGH SPEED REC• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION• F IS MODE BOOST• ZEBRA SETTING• COOLING FAN SETTING• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL• VIEW MODE SETTING• EVF/LCD SWITCH• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST• COMMAND DIAL LOCK• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• LOCK SETTING• PERFORMANCE• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER

Function Controls• Bluetooth ON/OFF• QUICK MENU

• PLAYBACK• NONEN To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE.

Shortcuts

10303

Lens Function Buttons
Choose the roles played by the function buttons on the lens
(where applicable).
Lens Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:

N A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.

Lens function button
Default
ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RINGA Z/FCONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)B L-Fn1 (rocker zoom button pressed up)
C L-Fn2 (rocker zoom button pressed down) CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)

Shortcuts

10304

Function Controls

Assigning Roles to the Lens Function Buttons
The roles played by the lens function buttons can be selectedusing the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > POWER ZOOM LENSFUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu.

305

Shortcuts• d WHEN SET TO B (ON/OFF SWITCH) • SHUTTER TYPE• IMAGE SIZE
• FLICKER REDUCTION• IMAGE QUALITY• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
• RAW
• ISO
• FILM SIMULATION• IS MODE• GRAIN EFFECT• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION• COLOR CHROME EFFECT• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• TTL-LOCK• DYNAMIC RANGE• MODELING FLASH• D RANGE PRIORITY• MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE• WHITE BALANCE• HIGH SPEED REC• CLARITY• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING• F IS MODE BOOST• FOCUS AREA
• ZEBRA SETTING• FOCUS CHECK• COOLING FAN SETTING• FOCUS MODE
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• AF MODE• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH• VIEW MODE SETTING• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF• EVF/LCD SWITCH• AF RANGE LIMITER• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD• FOCUS CHECK LOCK• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• PRE-SHOT sJ• HISTOGRAM• SELF-TIMER• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH• AE BKT SETTING• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• FOCUS BKT SETTING• F-Log VIEW ASSIST• PHOTOMETRY• COMMAND DIAL LOCK

10

Function Controls• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING• AWB LOCK ONLY• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)• LOCK SETTING• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)• PERFORMANCE• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)• Bluetooth ON/OFF• AE LOCK ONLY• QUICK MENU
• AF LOCK ONLY
• PLAYBACK• AE/AF LOCK• NONE• AF-ONN • To disable the function button, choose NONE.
• Selected function lock is not available when CONSTANT SPEEDZOOM (T) or CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W) is assigned to a lensfunction button (P 278).

Shortcuts

10306Peripherals and Optional
Accessories

307

Lenses
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
Lens Parts

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

A Lens hood
B Mounting marks
C Focus ring
D Zoom ring
E Aperture ringF O.I.S. switch
G Aperture mode switch
H Lens signal contacts
I Front lens cap
J Rear lens cap

N A XF18-55mmF2.8-4 R LM OIS lens is used here for illustrative purposes.

11

308

Lenses

Lens Care• Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry
cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently
with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied.
• Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use.
Removing Lens Caps
Remove lens caps as shown.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

O Lens caps may differ from those shown.

11

309

Attaching Lens Hoods
When attached, lens hoods reduce glareand protect the front lens element.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

310

Lenses

Lenses with Aperture Rings
At settings other than A, you can adjust
aperture by rotating the lens aperturering (exposure modes A and M).

A 16 11 8 5.6 4 2.8

A 16 11 8 5.6 4

Aperture ringN • Selecting ON for MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL disables theaperture ring.
• When the aperture ring is set to A, rotate the command dials to adjust
aperture.

The Aperture Mode Switch
If the lens has an aperture mode switch, aperture can be adjusted manually by sliding theswitch to Z and rotating the aperture ring.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Aperture ring
Aperture mode switch

11

311

Lenses with No Aperture Rings
Aperture can be adjusted using the front
command dial in modes A (aperture-priority AE) and M (manual).

N Aperture control can be reassigned to the rear command dial using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

Lenses with O.I.S. Switches
If the lens supports optical image stabilization (O.I.S.), the image stabilization mode can be chosen in the camera
menus. To activate image stabilization,slide the O.I.S. switch to ON.
O.I.S. switch
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

312

LensesManual Focus Lenses
Slide the focus ring to the front for autofocus.

For manual focus, slide the focus ring to
the back and rotate it while checking theresults in the camera display. The focus
distance and depth-of-field indicators
can be used to assist manual focus.

O Note that manual focus may not be available in all shooting modes.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

The Depth-of-Field Indicator
The depth-of-field indicator shows the approximate depth of field (the distance in front of andbehind the focus point that appears to be infocus). The indicator is displayed in film format.

11

313

Lenses

Power Zoom Lenses
Zoom can be adjusted on power zoom lenses using the zoom/
focus control ring, zoom button, or zoom ring.

O Adjusting zoom while the lens is wet makes it easier for water to findits way inside the lens. Wipe any water from the lens before adjustingzoom.

N A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.

Control
A Zoom ring
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

Description
Rotate the zoom ring to zoom in or out manually.
Rotate the zoom/focus control ring to zoom in or out
B Zoom/focus control ring using powered zoom. The zoom speed is proportional
to the speed with which the ring is rotated.
Switch the role of zoom/focus control ring from focus
C Z/F (zoom/focus) button
to zoom or vice versa.
Press a zoom button to zoom in or out at a steadyspeed using powered zoom. Zoom ends when the
D Zoom buttons
button is pressed a second time.

N • The Z/F and zoom buttons can be assigned other roles using

D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn)SETTING.
• The speed at which zoom can be adjusted via the zoom buttons canbe chosen using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS
SETTING.

314

External Flash Units
Use optional external flash units for flash photography.
Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be usedat shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed, whileothers can function as commanders controlling remoteunits via optical wireless flash control.

O You may be unable to test-fire the flash in some circumstances, for example when a setup menu is displayed on the camera.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when FLASH is selected for F FLASHSETTING > RED EYE REMOVAL. Red-eye removal minimizes “red-eye”
caused when light from the flash is reflected from the subject’s retinas.
Flash Sync Speed
The flash will synchronize with the mechanical shutter at shutter speeds of
1⁄250 s or slower and with the electronic shutter as speeds of 1⁄125 s or slower.
Optional Flash Units from Fujifilm
The camera can be used with optional Fujifilm shoe-mounted flash units.
Third-Party Flash Units
Do not use third-party flash units that apply over 300 V to the camera hot
shoe.

11

315

Flash Settings
1 Connect the unit to the camera.

2 In shooting mode, select FLASHFUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASHSETTING) menu tab. The options
available vary with the flash unit.

FLASH SETTINGFLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVALTTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTINGCOMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
EXIT

Description
P
Displayed when an optional EF-X8 ﬂash unit is mounted
EF-X8
317
on the hot shoe and raised.
Adjust settings for ﬂash units connected via the sync
SYNC
terminal. SYNC TERMINAL is displayed if the EF-X8 is
319
TERMINAL lowered and either no ﬂash unit, or an incompatible ﬂash
unit, is mounted on the hot shoe.
SHOE MOUNT Displayed when an optional ﬂash unit other than the
320
FLASH
EF-X8 is mounted on the hot shoe and turned on.
Displayed if an optional ﬂash unit functioning as a comCOMMANDER
mander for Fujiﬁlm optical wireless remote ﬂash control is 323(OPTICAL)
connected and turned on.
Menu

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

3 Highlight items using the focus stick

MODE
EF-X8

(focus lever) and rotate the rear command dial to change the highlighted
setting.
ADJUST

4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into effect.

11

316

END

External Flash Units

EF-X8
The following settings are available when an optional EF-X8
shoe-mounted flash unit is attached.
MODE
EF-X8

ADJUST

END

Setting317

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Description
Choose from the following options:• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust ﬂash compensation (B) and choose
a ﬂash mode (C).
• M: The ﬂash ﬁres at the selected output (B) regardless ofsubject brightness or camera settings. Output is expressedin fractions of full power, from ⁄ to ⁄. The desired results
may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limitsof the ﬂash control system; take a test shot and check the
A Flash control mode results.
• C (COMMANDER): Choose if the ﬂash is being used to control remote synced ﬂash units, for example as part of a studio ﬂash system.
• D (OFF): The EF-X8 does not ﬁre. Flash units connected
via the sync terminal will still ﬁre when the shutter is released, but can be disabled by lowering the EF-X8 and turning the units oﬀ in the ﬂash settings menu.
Adjustﬂash level. The options available vary with the ﬂash
Flashcompensation/Bcontrol mode (A).
output11

Setting

C Flash mode (TTL)

D SyncPeripherals and Optional Accessories

11

318

Description
Choose a ﬂash mode for TTL ﬂash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The ﬂash ﬁres only as required; ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the ﬂash will ﬁre when the photo is taken.
• F (STANDARD): The ﬂash ﬁres with every shot if possible;
ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully charged when the shutter isreleased.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ﬂash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
Choose whether the ﬂash is timed to ﬁre immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended inmost circumstances.

External Flash UnitsSYNC TERMINAL
The following options are available when no compatible flash
unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal oruses only the X-contact on the hot shoe.
MODE
SYNC TERMINAL

ADJUST

END

Setting

The Sync Terminal
Use the sync terminal to connect flash units
that require a sync cable.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Description
Choose from the following options:• M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts
when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower thanA Flash control mode the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if theunit uses long ﬂashes or has a slow response time.
• D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled.
Choose whether the ﬂash is timed to ﬁre immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
B Syncit closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended inmost circumstances.

11

319

SHOE MOUNT FLASHThe following options are available when an optional
shoe-mounted flash unit is attached and turned on.
MODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH

ADJUST

Setting

END

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Description
The ﬂash control mode selected with the ﬂash unit. This canin some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options available vary with the ﬂash.
• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust ﬂash compensation (B).
• M: The ﬂash ﬁres at the selected output regardless of subject
A Flash control mode brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be
adjusted from the camera (B).
• MULTI: Repeating ﬂash. Compatible shoe-mounted ﬂash
units will ﬁre multiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): The ﬂash does not ﬁre. Some ﬂash units can beturned oﬀ from the camera.

11

320

External Flash Units

Setting

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Description
The options available vary with ﬂash control mode.
• TTL: Adjust ﬂash compensation (the full value may not beapplied if the limits of the ﬂash control system are exceeded). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the selected value is added to the value selected with the ﬂash unit.
B Flash compensation/ • M/MULTI: Adjust ﬂash output (compatible units only).
outputChoose from values expressed as fractions of full power,
from ⁄ (mode M) or ¼ (MULTI) down to ⁄ in increments
equivalent to ⁄ EV. The desired results may not be achieved
at low values if they exceed the limits of the ﬂash control
system; take a test shot and check the results.
Choose a ﬂash mode for TTL ﬂash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The ﬂash ﬁres only as required; ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the ﬂash will ﬁre when the photo is taken.
F (STANDARD): The ﬂash ﬁres with every shot if possible;•
C Flash mode (TTL) ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully charged when the shutter isreleased.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ﬂash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.

11

321

Setting

D SyncE ZoomF Lighting
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

G LED light
G Number of flashes *H Frequency *Description
Control ﬂash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately before the
shutter closes.
• R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ﬂash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for ﬂash control mode.
The angle of illumination (ﬂash coverage) for units that support ﬂash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to bemade from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing
coverage.
• K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage formore even lighting.
Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photography (compatible units only): as a catchlight (M/CATCHLIGHT),
as an AF-assist illuminator (N/AF ASSIST), or as both a catchlight and an AF-assist illuminator (O/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT).
Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography.
Choose the number of times the ﬂash ﬁres each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the frequency at which the ﬂash ﬁres in MULTI mode.

* Full value may not be applied if limits of ﬂash control system are exceeded.

11

322

External Flash Units

COMMANDER(OPTICAL)The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning
as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control.
MODE
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)

ADJUST

END

B

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control offers a choice offour channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of opticalsignals between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
The flash units can also be placed in up to
three groups (A, B, and C) and flash modeCand flash level adjusted separately forAeach group.

11

323

Setting

A Flash control mode(group A)

B Flash control mode(group B)

C Flash control mode(group C)

D Flash compensation/
output (group A)
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

E Flash compensation/
output (group B)

F Flash compensation/
output (group C)

11

324

Description
Choose ﬂash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%
is available for groups A and B only.
• TTL: The units in the group ﬁre in TTL mode. Flash compensation can be adjusted separately for each group.
• TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you canspecify the output of the selected group as a percentage of the other and adjust overall ﬂash compensation
for both groups.
• M: In mode M, the units in the group ﬁre at the selected
output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardlessof subject brightness or camera settings.
• MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units
in all groups to repeating ﬂash mode. All units will ﬁremultiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will
not ﬁre.
Adjust ﬂash level for the selected group according tooption selected for ﬂash control mode. Note that the fullvalue may not be applied if the limits of the ﬂash control
system are exceeded.
• TTL: Adjust ﬂash compensation.
• M/MULTI: Adjust ﬂash output.
• TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B andadjust overall ﬂash compensation.

External Flash Units

Setting

G Flash mode (TTL)I ZoomJ Lighting

325

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

H SyncDescription
Choose a ﬂash mode for TTL ﬂash control. The options
available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The ﬂash ﬁres only as required; ﬂash
level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A
p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressedhalfway indicates that the ﬂash will ﬁre when the photois taken.
• F (STANDARD): The ﬂash ﬁres with every shot if possible; ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully charged when the
shutter is released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ﬂash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The ﬂash will not ﬁre if not
fully charged when the shutter is released.
Control ﬂash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately after the
shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately before the
shutter closes.
• R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ﬂash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for ﬂash control mode.
The angle of illumination (ﬂash coverage) for units that support ﬂash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to bemade from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage.
• K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coveragefor more even lighting.

11External Flash Units

Setting

K Commander

K Number of flashes
L Channel
L Frequency
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

326

Description
Choose the group for units functioning as a commander for Fujiﬁlm optical wireless remote ﬂash control in TTL,
TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clipon ﬂash units that support Fujiﬁlm optical wireless remoteﬂash control.
• Gr A: Assign the commander to group A.
• Gr B: Assign the commander to group B.
• Gr C: Assign the commander to group C.
• OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that
does not aﬀect the ﬁnal picture.
Choose the number of times the ﬂash ﬁres each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the channel used by the commander for communication with the remote ﬂash units. Separate channels
can be used for diﬀerent ﬂash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
Choose the frequency at which the ﬂash ﬁres in MULTI
mode.

Vertical Battery Grips
The VG-XH vertical battery grip can be used to supplement
the camera battery or when holding the camera rotated totake pictures in portrait (“tall”) orientation.

M Focus stick (focus lever)
N Rear command dialO AFON button
P AEL (exposure lock) button
Q Q (quick menu) button
R Indicator lamps
S Performance selector
T Battery tray
U Battery-chamber cover latch
V Connector
W Compartment for connector coversupplied with camera

N All controls perform the same function as the matching controls on
the camera.

327

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

A Fn1 button
B WB button
C ISO button
D Shutter button
E Control lock
F Front command dial
G Lock screw knob
H Tripod socket
I Eyelet for camera strap
J Connector cover
K Lock screw
L Serial number plate

11

Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip
(A)

(B)

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

N • Check that the camera is off before attaching or removing the verticalbattery grip.
• The camera file transmitter/vertical battery grip connector cover (A)can be stored in the grip connector cover compartment. Keep thegrip contact cap (B) in a safe place when not in use.

O • Fully tighten the lock screw knob after attaching the grip.
• Do not touch the contacts.
• After removing the grip, replace the file transmitter/vertical battery
grip connector cover (A) and contact cap (B).

• The grip is not waterproof, and caution is required to prevent the en-try of dirt, dust, water, noxious gases, salt, and other foreign matter.
Do not place the grip on wet surfaces. Before use, be sure that thebattery tray and battery-chamber cover are fully closed.

11

328

Vertical Battery Grips

Inserting and Removing BatteriesInsert the batteries as shown.

The batteries can be removed as shown.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

N • Be sure the camera is off before exchanging batteries.
• Use only NP-W235 batteries.

11

329

Battery Level
When a vertical battery grip is connected, thecamera battery level display shows the camera
battery level and the level of the batteries inserted in the VG-XH.

• The display shows the level of inserted batteries only.
• When a full complement of batteries are inserted in the camera and the
VG-XH, the batteries will be used in the following order:
A The left grip battery (L)B The right grip battery (R)C The camera battery

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

330

Vertical Battery Grips

Charging the Batteries
The batteries in the vertical battery grip
will charge when the grip is attached toa camera that is connected to an AC-5VJ
AC adapter via a USB cable.
The indicator lamps will light green while
the battery charges; the lamp on the left
shows the status of the left battery, thelamp on the right the status of the rightbattery.

Indicator lamp
On
Oﬀ
BlinksBattery status
Battery charging
Charging complete
Battery fault

reduces charging times to as little as 180 minutes.

• The batteries will not charge while the camera is on.
• For more information, see “Charging the Battery” (P 46) and “TheBattery and Power Supply” (P 348).

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

O • All three batteries charge simultaneously; charging takes about
330 minutes.
• Using a device that supplies power with an outputs of 45 W or above

11

331

File Transmitters
Attach an optional FT-XH file transmitter to connect towireless LAN or Ethernet networks for file upload or tethered photography. The FT-XH can also be used in combination with a battery inserted in the camera for greater
battery capacity.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

A Fn1 button
B WB button
C ISO button
D Shutter button
E Control lock
F Front command dial
G Lock screw knob
H Tripod socket
I Eyelet for camera strap
J Connector cover
K Lock screw
L Serial number plate
M Focus stick (focus lever)
N Rear command dialO AFON button

332

P AEL (exposure lock) button
Q Q (quick menu) button
R Indicator lamps
S Performance selector
T Battery tray
U Battery-chamber cover latch
V USB connector cover
W LAN connector cover
X USB connector (Type-C)
Y Hole to screw USB cable
Z LAN connectora Connectorb Compartment for connector coversupplied with camera

File Transmitters

N • The controls on the FT-XH perform the same functions as the matching controls on the camera.
• The USB (Type-C) connector is for smartphone tethering only. Use

the camera USB connector when uploading pictures to a computer or smartphone, performing tethered photography via USB, or
charging batteries.
• For information for accessing network/USB features while the filetransmitter is connected, visit:https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/

Attaching the File Transmitter
The procedure is the same as for vertical battery grips (P 328).
Inserting and Removing Batteries
The procedure is the same as for vertical battery grips (P 329).

O Access to the network/USB features in only available when a battery

is inserted in the camera and at least one battery is inserted in thetransmitter.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Charging the Batteries
The procedure is the same as for vertical battery grips (P 331).

11

333

Cooling Fans
Cooling fans help keep the camera cool, allowing longer
periods of non-stop movie recording.
Attaching a Cooling FanOpen the monitor and attach an FAN-001 cooling fan.

O Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the fan.
1 Open the monitor.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

2 Remove the camera cooling fan connector cover and the

fan connector cap.
After removing the cooling fan connector cover (A), attach
it to the fan for safe-keeping. Keep the fan connector cap (B)in a safe place.

(B)
(A)

11
(A)

334

Cooling Fans

3 Place the fan on the camera, making sure the screws andconnectors are correctly aligned.

4 Tighten the screws.

ened.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

N The cooling fan may fall off if the screws are not sufficiently tight-

11

335

Cooling Fans

Using the FanFan speed can be adjusted using the A SHOOTING SETTING >xF COOLING FAN SETTING and B MOVIE SETTING >xF COOLING FAN SETTING options in the photo and movie
menus, respectively. Select OFF to turn the fan off.

O At some speeds, the noise of the fan may be audible in movies recorded with the camera.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

336

Technical Notes

337

Accessories from Fujifilm
The following optional accessories are available from Fujifilm.
For the latest information on the accessories available in yourregion, check with your local Fujifilm representative or visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
NP-W235: Additional high-capacity NP-W235 rechargeable batteries can be purchased as required.
Dual battery chargers
BC-W235: The BC-W235 can charge up to two NP-W235 batteries at a time. At+25 °C/+77 °F, the batteries will charge in about 200 minutes. Using a device that
supplies power with an outputs of 30 W or above reduces charging times to as
little as 150 minutes.
Eye cups
EC-XH W/EC-XT L/EC-XT M/EC-XT S/EC-GFX: Attach viewﬁnder eyecups to prevent lightleaking into the viewﬁnder window.

Remote releases
RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure (⌀2.5 mm).
Stereo microphones
MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording.
FUJINON lenses
XF-/XC-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
FUJINON MKX-series lenses: Cinema lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount.
Technical Notes

Macro extension tubes
MCEX-11/16: Attach between the camera and the lens to shoot at high reproduction ratios.
Teleconverters
XF1.4X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 1.4×.
XF2X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 2.0×.

12338

Accessories from Fujifilm

Mount adapters
FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER: Allows the camera to be used with a wide selectionof M-mount lenses.
Body caps
BCP-001: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached.

Vertical battery grips
VG-XH: See “Vertical battery grips” (P 327).

Technical Notes

Shoe-mounted flash units
EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL ﬂash control, this clip-on ﬂash unit has a
Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the ﬂash sync speed. Featuring
support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fujiﬁlm optical wireless ﬂash
control, it can be used as a commander or remote ﬂash unit for remote wirelessﬂash photography.
EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 ﬂash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries.
EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL ﬂash control, this clip-on ﬂash unit has a
Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the ﬂash sync speed. It can also
be used as remote ﬂash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless commander.
EF-W1: With support for the NAS * wireless communication standard developedby Nissin Japan, this wireless ﬂash commander can be used with optional EF-60
clip-on ﬂash units and other NAS-compliant units.
* NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd.
EF-X8: This compact, clip-on ﬂash unit draws power from the camera has a Guide
Number of approximately 8/26 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and can cover the angle of view ofa 16 mm lens (equivalent to 24 mm in 35 mm format).
EF-42: This clip-on ﬂash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) andsupports manual and TTL ﬂash control.
EF-X20: This clip-on ﬂash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) andsupports manual and TTL ﬂash control.
EF-20: This clip-on ﬂash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) andsupports TTL ﬂash control (manual ﬂash control is not supported).

12339

Accessories from Fujifilm

File transmitters
FT-XH: See “File Transmitters” (P 332).
Cooling fans
FAN-001: See “Cooling Fans” (P 334).
Grip belts
GB-001: Improves grip. Combine with a hand grip for more secure handling.
Cover kits
CVR-XH: A set of covers for the X-H2S. Contains a sync terminal cap, a hot-shoecover, and a memory card slot cover, as well as two ﬁle transmitter/vertical battery grip connector covers.
instax SHARE printers
SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax ﬁlm.

Technical Notes

12340

Software for Use with Your Camera
The camera can be used with the following software. For thelatest information on software available from Fujifilm, visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Smartphone Apps
Establish a wireless connection between your camera and asmartphone or tablet.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIXRAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conversion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW
pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats.
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free ofcharge from the Fujifilm website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converterex-powered-by-silkypix/

N • “RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX” is supplied by Ichikawa
Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd.
• For information on when support will be available, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-expowered-by-silkypix/

Technical Notes

12341

Capture One Express for Fujifilm
View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats. Capture One Express for Fujifilm is available free ofcharge from Capture One A/S.
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm

N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available.

Capture One for Fujifilm
Capture One for Fujifilm workflow software from Capture One
A/S supports tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pictures into other formats.
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm

N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available.

FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom)
A plug-in for Adobe Lightroom Classic.

• FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO/FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in

https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/adobe-photoshop-lightroomtether-plugin/

Technical Notes

FUJIFILM X AcquireThis computer application lets you connect to the camera via USB
or Wi-Fi and automatically download photos to a specified folder
as they are taken, or backup and restore the camera via USB.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/12342Software for Use with Your Camera

FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO can use the camera’s unique image processing
engine to rapidly convert RAW files to create high-quality images
in other formats.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/

Technical Notes

12
343

For Your Safety
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONSInstructions: All the safety and operating instructions Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed• Read Instructions
should be read before the appliance is operated.

so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by

Instructions: The safety and operating instructions items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten• Retain Instructions

Technical Notes

12should be retained for future reference.
tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the where they exit from the appliance.
• Heed Warnings
operating instructions should be adhered to.
Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable
Instructions: All operating and use instructions cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may• Follow Instructions
should be followed.
fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
Installation
Power Sources: This video product should be operated only bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or soldfrom the type of power source indicated on the marking la- with the video product. Any mounting of the appliancebel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com- use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacpany. For video products intended to operate from battery turer.
power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. An appliance and cart combination
Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped should be moved with care. Quickwith a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having stops, excessive force, and unevenone blade wider than the other). This plug will ﬁt into the surfaces may cause the appliance andpower outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are cart combination to overturn.
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing
the plug. If the plug should still fail to ﬁt, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety Antennas
Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cablepurpose of the polarized plug.
system is connected to the video product, be sure the anAlternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide somea three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
(grounding) pin. This plug will only ﬁt into a grounding-type Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding ofinsert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re- the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-inplace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conof the grounding type plug.
ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection toOverloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
cords as this can result in a risk of ﬁre or electric shock.
electrode.
Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS
for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prodPER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings
Antenna Lead
Ground Clamp
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should neverin Wirebe blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug,
AntennaAnor other similar surface.
Discharge Unit
D
Electric Servicee EquipmenttThis video product should not be placed in a built-in instal(NECN SECTION
lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is8810-20)provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adGround Clamps
hered to. This video product should never be placed near orover a radiator or heat register.
Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by Power Service Grounding Electrodethe video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. System (NEC ART 250. PART H)
Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near water—for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink,or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool,and the like.

344

Grounding
Conductors (NECSECTION 810-21)

For Your Safety
Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat- Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product fromed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualiﬁed service personlight or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power nel under the following conditions:lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, • When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such • If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into thepower lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
video product.
• If the video product has been exposed to rain or water.
Use
If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has
Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be- •been damaged.
fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
If the video product does not operate normally follow the
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are
Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustthis video product through openings as they may touch dan- ment of other controls may result in damage and will often
gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in require extensive work by a qualiﬁed technician to restore
a ﬁre or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the the video product to its normal operation.
video product.
When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perforLightning: For added protection for this video product re- mance — this indicates a need for service.
ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended
Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be
and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
sure the service technician has used replacement parts specoutlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
iﬁed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics asprevent damage to the video product due to lightning andthe original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in
power-line surges.
ﬁre, electric shock or other hazards.
Service
Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs toServicing: Do not attempt to service this video product this video product, ask the service technician to perform
yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to safety checks to determine that the video product is in propdangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to er operating condition.
qualiﬁed service personnel.

Be sure to read these notes before use
Safety Notes• Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these

The symbols on the product (including the accesories) represent the following:safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use.

AC

• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.

DC

About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product isused incorrectly as a result.
This icon indicates that death or serious inWARNING jury can result if the information is ignored.

The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that theaction indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).

WARNING
If a problem arises, turn the camera off, remove thebattery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC
power adapter. Continued use of the camera when
Unplugit is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor,
from power
or is in any other abnormal state can cause a ﬁre orsocketelectric shock. Contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer.
Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the camera or connecting cables. Do not use the camera orconnecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt
water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids.
Should liquid ﬁnd its way into the camera or connecting cables, turn the camera oﬀ, remove thebattery, disconnect the USB cable, and disconnect
and unplug the AC adapter. Continued use of thecamera can cause a ﬁre or electric shock. Contact
your Fujiﬁlm dealer.

345

Technical Notes

This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored.

Class II equipment (The construction of the productis double-insulated.)

12

WARNING
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This
Do not use in can cause a ﬁre or electric shock.
the bathroomor shower

Do notdisassemble

Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never open the case). Failure to observe this precaution
can cause ﬁre or electric shock.

Should the case break open as the result of a fall or otheraccident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shockor in injury from touching the damaged parts. ReDo not touch
internal move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
parts
injury or electric shock, and take the product to thepoint of purchase for consultation.
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connection cord and do not place heavy objects on the connection cord. These actions could damage the cord andcause a ﬁre or electric shock. If the cord is damaged,
contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer. Do not use cables withbent connectors.
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. Thiscan cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause
injury.
Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do
not use the camera while walking or driving. Thiscan result in you falling down or being involved ina traﬃc accident.
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during athunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due
to induced current from the lightning discharge.
Do not use the battery except as specified. Load thebattery as shown by the indicator.

Technical Notes

Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or otherabnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects.
Failure to observe these precautions could resultin the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, orleaking, causing ﬁre, burns, or other injury.
Use only batteries or AC power adapters specified foruse with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the
power supply voltage shown. The use of other powersources can cause a ﬁre.

12
346

WARNING
If the battery leaks and fluid gets in contact with youreyes, skin or clothing, flush the affected area with cleanwater and seek medical attention or call an emergency
number right away.
Do not use the charger to charge batteries other thanthose specified here. The supplied charger is for use
only with batteries of the type supplied with thecamera. Using the charger to charge conventional
batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries
can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst.
Using a flash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
visual impairment. Take particular care when photographing infants and young children.
Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in
low-temperature burns, particularly during prolonged use, at high ambient temperatures, when
HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.,
or with users who suﬀer from poor circulation or
reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod orsimilar precautions are recommended.
Do not use in the presence of flammable objects, explosive gases, or dust.
When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover thebattery terminals with insulation tape. Contact withother metallic objects or batteries could cause thebattery to ignite or burst.
Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small partsout of the reach of small children. Children may
swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical
attention or call emergency.
Keep out of reach of small children. Among the elements that could cause injury are the strap, which
could become entangled about a child’s neck,causing strangulation, and the ﬂash, which could
cause visual impairment.
Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
This product generates radio-frequency emissions
that could interfere with navigational or medical
equipment.

For Your Safety
CAUTION
Do not use this camera in locations affected by oil
fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a ﬁreor electric shock.
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in locations such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight.
This can cause a ﬁre.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This cancause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause
injury.
Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter isstill connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to
disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage
the power cord or cables and cause a ﬁre or electric
shock.
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapter in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build
up and distort the casing or cause a ﬁre.
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fit
securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this precaution could result in ﬁre or electric shock.
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to
use the camera for an extended period, remove the battery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter.
Failure to do so can cause a ﬁre or electric shock.
When charging ends, unplug the charger from thepower socket. Leaving the charger plugged into thepower socket can cause a ﬁre.
When a memory card is removed, the card could comeout of the slot too quickly. Use your finger to hold it andgently release the card. Injury could result to thosestruck by the ejected card.
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting
in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing
it from the camera.

Technical Notes

Request regular internal testing and cleaning for yourcamera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause
a ﬁre or electric shock. Contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer
to request internal cleaning every two years. Please
note that this service is not free of charge.
Dispose of the product in accord with location regulations.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.

12
347

The Battery and Power Supply
Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read ■ Cautions: Handling the Battery
the appropriate sections.
• Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neckWARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat laces or hairpins.
• Do not expose to ﬂame or heat.
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
Do not disassemble or modify.
The following describes the proper use of batteries and how •Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures.
to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or •• Use with designated chargers only.
cause leakage, overheating, ﬁre, or explosion.
• Dispose of used batteries promptly.
Li-ion Batteries• Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks.
Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion • Do not expose to water.
battery.
• Keep the terminals clean.
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery • The battery and camera body may become warm to thetouch after extended use. This is normal.
before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use.
■ Caution: Disposal■ Notes on the Battery
The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations.
Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects ofCharge the battery one or two days before use.
battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate.
Battery life can be extended by turning the camera oﬀ when
Do not mechanically crush or split batteries.
not in use.
Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted AC Power Adaptersbattery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged • The AC power adapter is for indoor use only.
spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, • Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera.
or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and • Turn the camera oﬀ before disconnecting the adapter. Disinsert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable.
battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating • Do not disassemble.
devices.
• Do not expose to high heat and humidity.
• Do not subject to strong physical shocks.
■ Charging the Battery
The battery can be charged using the camera and supplied • The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during
AC adapter or an optional BC-W235 dual battery charger. use. This is normal.
Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below • If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate+10 °C (+50 °F) or above +35 °C (+95 °F). Do not attempt to the receiving antenna.

Technical Notes

12charge the battery at temperatures above +40 °C (+104 °F); at
temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the battery will not charge.
Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery
does not however need to be fully discharged before charging.
The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after
charging or use. This is normal.
■ Battery Life
A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery willhold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its service life and should be replaced.
If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you
may ﬁnd that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds acharge. Charge the battery regularly.
■ Storage

If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store
it at room temperature with the battery charged to approximately one half to ⁄ capacity.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient
temperature of from +15 °C to +25 °C (+59 °F to +77 °F). Do
not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature.

348

For Your Safety
Using the Camera• Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, Trademark Information

Technical Notes

including artiﬁcial light sources or natural light sources Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark ofsuch as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or
precaution could damage the camera image sensor.
registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces• Strong sunlight focused through the viewﬁnder may dam- included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Taiage the panel of electronic viewﬁnder (EVF). Do not aim wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS,
the electronic viewﬁnder at the sun.
Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks ofApple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a
Take Test Shotsregistered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as
and other countries. Android is a trademark or registeredat weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a
trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Phototest shot and view the results to ensure that the camera isshop, and Lightroom are trademarks or registered trademarks
functioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other counliability for damages or lost proﬁts incurred as a result oftries. Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and Wi-Fi Protected
product malfunction.
Setup® are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance®. The
Notes on CopyrightBluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks
Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks
using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways by Fujiﬁlm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC logos arethat infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own- trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark of the CFA
er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing (CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is a trademark orof stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade
when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or registo note that the transfer of memory cards containing images tered trademarks of their respective owners.
or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible
Electrical Interference
within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws.
This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equipHandlingment. Consult with hospital or airline staﬀ before using the
To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject camera in a hospital or on an aircraft.
the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are
Color Television Systems
being recorded.
NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color teleLiquid Crystal
vision telecasting speciﬁcation adopted mainly in the U.S.A.,
In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak- Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color
en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action television system adopted mainly in European countries andindicated should any of the following situations arise:
China.
• If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap andExif Print is a newly revised digital camera ﬁle format in whichrunning water.
information stored with photographs is used for optimal col• If liquid crystal enters your eyes, ﬂush the aﬀected eye with or reproduction during printing.
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical
assistance.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software• If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed softwith water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom- ware without the permission of the applicable governing
iting, then seek medical assistance.
bodies is prohibited.
Although the display is manufactured using extremely
Lenses and Other Accessories
high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that arealways lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and • Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod.
• Fujiﬁlm will not be held liable for performance issues orimages recorded with the product are unaﬀected.
damage caused by the use of third-party accessories.

12349

NOTICES
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.
Please read the “Safety Notes” and make sure you understand them before using the camera.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply. See:
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
For Customers in the U. S. A.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE

Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the government’s requirements for exposure to radio waves. This
device is designed and manufactured not to exceed theemission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy
set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.
Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25
Government.
Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25
The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of
FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC measurement known as the Speciﬁc Absorption Rate, or SAR.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and conducted using standard operating positions accepted by(2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certiﬁed
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
power level in all tested frequency bands.
CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant this product must be used with a Fujiﬁlm-speciﬁed ferto Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro- rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord.
vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, andthe product you have purchased. Please call
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how toused in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
recycle this battery.
interference to radio communications. However, there is noTechnical Notes

guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined byturning the equipment oﬀ and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit diﬀerent
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modiﬁcations not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

12350

California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 4, Appliance Efﬁciency Regulations, Sections 1601 through
1609

For Your Safety
For Customers in Canada
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B)In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana- Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or indian ICES-003.
the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its
Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus- packaging indicates that this product shall not
try Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the be treated as household waste. Instead it should
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause in- be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling ofterference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, electrical and electronic equipment.
including interference that may cause undesired operation By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you willof the device.
help prevent potential negative consequences to the enThis device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op- vironment and human health, which could otherwise be
erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection This symbol on the batteries or accumulators
feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. indicates that those batteries shall not be treated
Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scientiﬁc evi- as household waste.
dence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accuproof, however, that these low power wireless devices are mulators please dispose these separately according to yourabsolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels local requirements.
of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural rebeing used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health sources. For more detailed information about recycling thiseﬀects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does product, please contact your local city oﬃce, your household
not produce heating eﬀects causes no known adverse health waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased theeﬀects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not product.
found any biological eﬀects. Some studies have suggested In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland andthat some biological eﬀects might occur, but such ﬁndings Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including
have not been conﬁrmed by additional research. X-H2S has the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local aubeen tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal.
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
that they are to be disposed of separately.
Operation in the band 5150–5250 MHz is only for indoor use
to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems.
Caring for the Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions.

Technical Notes

Storage and Use
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera
in locations that are:• exposed to rain, steam, or smoke• very humid or extremely dusty• exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day• extremely cold
• subject to strong vibration• exposed to strong magnetic ﬁelds, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer,
or magnet• in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides• next to rubber or vinyl products

12351

Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions
This product complies with the following EU Directives:• RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU• RE Directive 2014/53/EU
Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF210002 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x-h2s/pdf/x-h2s_doc-nkt.pdf
The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/x-h2s/pdf/x-h2s_doc-nkt_uk.pdf
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:

Technical Notes

12This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth®).
• Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):WLAN 2.4 GHz: 10.81 dBm
WLAN 5 GHz: 12.56 dBm
Bluetooth: 1.86 dBm
IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the camera’s built-in wireless transmitter.
Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States
Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United Statesembargoes goods.
device. Fujiﬁlm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized• Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.
use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems thatmay directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater
degree of reliability than oﬀered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions toensure safety and prevent malfunction.
• Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network
and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device.
Fujiﬁlm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions.
• Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter inthe vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic ﬁelds, static electricity, or radio interference thatmay prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity ofother wireless devices operating in the 2.4 GHz band.
• The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
• Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater attention to security than applies in the case of wired networks.
- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayedon your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have accessrights.
- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.
- Do not connect this device directly to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated byproviders or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services.
The• following may be punishable by law:
- Disassembly or modiﬁcation or this device- Removal of device certiﬁcation labels• This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also operates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking
systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications.
• To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Conﬁrm that the RFID transmitter is not in
operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used
for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the aﬀected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that
this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fujiﬁlm representative.

352

For Your Safety• Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-

uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when oﬀ. This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in
the network/USB setting menu before boarding.
• Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/
UK/HR. 5150 MHz–5350 MHz is for indoor use only.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certiﬁed output power level inall frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.235 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue.

U.K. Importer:
FUJIFILM UK Limited
Fujiﬁlm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom
EU Importer:
FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbHFujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany

Technical Notes

12353

For Your Safety
Be sure to read these notes before using the lens
Safety Notes

WARNING• Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety
notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use.
• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.

About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product isused incorrectly as a result.
This icon indicates that death or serious
WARNING injury can result if the information is ignored.
This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that theaction indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).

Do notimmerseDo not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to observe this precaution can cause a ﬁre or electric
shock.

Do notdisassemble

Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure
to observe this precaution can cause ﬁre, electric
shock, or injury due to product malfunction.

Should the case break open as the result of a fall or otheraccident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shockor in injury from touching the damaged parts. ReDo not touch
internal move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
parts
injury or electric shock, and take the product to thepoint of purchase for consultation.
Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may
fall, causing injury.
Do not view the sun through the lens or camera viewfinders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause
permanent visual impairment.

CAUTION
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
Failure to observe this precaution can cause ﬁre orelectric shock.
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution
can cause ﬁre.
Keep out of the reach of small children. This productcould cause injury in the hands of a child.
Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe thisprecaution can cause electric shock.
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when
the sun is in or close to the frame can cause ﬁreor burns.

Technical Notes

When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps andstore out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by thelens can cause ﬁre or burns.
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other objects, causing injury.

12354

Product CareTo ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe
the following precautions.
Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after
each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals,
which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body.
Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately witha soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor,
taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft,
dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied. To prevent dust
entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is inplace.
Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in
identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the image sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING > SENSOR
CLEANING.

Technical Notes

12355

Cleaning the Image Sensor
Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING >SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as described below.

O Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if
it is damaged during cleaning.

1 Use a blower (not a brush) to remove
dust from the sensor.

N Do not use a brush or blower brush.

Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the sensor.

2 Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary.

3 Replace the body cap or lens.

Technical Notes

12356

Firmware Updates
Updates to product firmware may result in changes notdescribed in the manual. For more information, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
Checking the Firmware Version

O The camera will only display the firmware version if a memory card isinserted.

1 Turn the camera off and check that a memory card is inserted.
2 Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The
current firmware version will be displayed; check the firmware version.

3 Turn the camera off.

N To view the firmware version or update firmware for optional accessories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted flash units, andmount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera.

Technical Notes

12357

Troubleshooting
Consult the table below should you encounter problems
using your camera. If you don’t find the solution here, contact your local Fujifilm distributor.

N Troubleshooting information for network/USB features is available at:https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/

Power and Battery
Problem

Solution• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 46).

The camera does notturn on.

• The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct orientation (P 40).

• The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the bat-Technical Notes

tery-chamber cover (P 40).
The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned oﬀ
The monitor does notand then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button
turn on.
pressed halfway until the monitor activates.
• The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pocket or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera immediately before taking a picture.
• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
The battery runs down with a soft, dry cloth.
quickly.
• ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF: Turn
PRE-AF oﬀ (P 152).
• The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERYAGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 248).
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a
The camera turns off
fully-charged spare battery (P 46).
suddenly.
The camera does not The camera may be busy. Check the indicator lamp
turn off.
(P 11).

12358

Troubleshooting

Problem

Solution• Make sure that the AC power adapter is correctly pluggedin (P 46).

• Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to theCharging does not start.

AC power adapter (P 46).

• The battery has not been recharged for an extended period: If

Technical Notes

the battery has not been charged for an extended period,
charging will be disabled to ensure safety. Replace it witha new battery.
• Insert the camera battery (P 40).
• Reinsert the camera battery in the correct orientation(P 40).
Charging does not start • Conﬁrm that the camera is connected to the computer(USB).
(P 49).
• If the computer is oﬀ or in sleep mode, turn on or wakethe computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable (P 49).
• Insert the battery.
Charging does not start • Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation.
(battery charger).
• The AC adapter is not correctly connected to the charger: Check
that adapter is correctly connected to the charger.
Charging is slow.
Charge the battery at room temperature.
• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
with a soft, dry cloth (P 40).
The indicator lamp
The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY•
blinks, but the battery
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replacedoes not charge.
it with a new battery (P 248). If the battery still fails tocharge, contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer (P 338).
The power supply icon is Conﬁrm that POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is senot displayed.
lected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING.

12359

Menus and Displays
Problem

Solution
Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING > Qa
Display is not in English.
(P 54, 247).

Shooting
Problem

Solution• The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete
pictures (P 42, 223).

• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory cardin the camera (P 244).

• There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts

Technical Notes

with a soft, dry cloth.
No picture is taken when
The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card•
the shutter button is(P 42).
pressed.
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 46).
• The camera has turned off automatically: Turn the camera on(P 50).
• You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 271).
Mottling (“noise”)
Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject isappears in the monitor
poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result
or viewfinder whenin noticeable mottling when images are previewed in thethe shutter button isdisplays. Images taken with the camera are unaﬀected.
pressed halfway.
• The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or manual focus (P 109).
The camera does not
focus.
• The focus area is too small for the intended subject: Increase
the size of the focus area by a couple of steps (P 98).
No panorama isrecorded when the
The indicator lamp was orange when you attempted to record a
shutter button is
panorama: Wait until the indicator lamps turns oﬀ (P 11).
pressed.

12360

Troubleshooting

Problem

Solution• The subject’s face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, orother objects: Remove the obstructions (P 153).

• The subject’s face occupies only a small area of the frame:

Technical Notes

Change the composition so that the subject’s face occupies a larger area of the frame (P 153).
No face is detected.
• The subject’s face is turned away from the camera: Ask the subject to face the camera (P 153).
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is off: Turn g FACE/EYE
DETECTION SETTING on (P 153).
• The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level.
• The subject’s face is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
• The subject is partially hidden: Choose a vantage point
where you can see as much of the subject as possible(P 155).
• The subject occupies only a small portion of the frame: Get
No subject is detected. closer to your subject so it occupies more of the frame(P 155).
• OFF is selected for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING: Select
SUBJECT DETECTION ON (P 155).
• The subject is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
• The flash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 175).
• The electronic shutter is enabled: Choose a SHUTTER TYPE
that does not use the electronic shutter (P 171).
The flash does not fire. • The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 46).
• The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single
frame mode (P 9).
• The subject is not in range of the flash: Position the subject inrange of the ﬂash.
The flash does not fully
The flash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly.
•
light the subject.
• Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower
shutter speed (P 74, 78, 373).

12
361

Problem

Pictures are blurred.

Solution• The lens is dirty: Clean the lens.
• The lens is blocked: Keep objects away from the lens
(P 57).

• s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is displayed in red: Check focus before shooting (P 58).

• Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is high: This

is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. * Use pixel
mapping (P 141).

Pictures are mottled.

* X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interactingwith the image sensor may cause bright spots of various colors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce
the occurrence of such bright spots.

• The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:

Turn the camera oﬀ and wait for it to cool down (P 50,
368).
• A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera oﬀ andwait for it to cool down (P 50, 368).

Technical Notes

12362Troubleshooting

Playback
Problem
Pictures are grainy.
Playback zoom isunavailable.

No sound in movie
playback.

Solution
The pictures were taken with a diﬀerent make or model ofcamera.
The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a diﬀerent
make or model of camera.
• Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume(P 252).
• The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly
during recording.
• The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during
playback.

Selected pictures are notdeleted.
Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected.
Pictures remain after Remove protection using the device with which it was
ERASE > ALL FRAMES is originally applied (P 227).
selected.
The battery-chamber cover was opened while the camFile numbering is
era was on. Turn the camera oﬀ before opening the batunexpectedly reset.
tery-chamber cover (P 281).

Technical Notes

12363

Troubleshooting

Connections
Problem

Solution
The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on
The monitor is blank.
the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 60).
The display mode selected with the VIEW MODE button is
Both the TV and camera EVF ONLY + E: Put your eye to the viewﬁnder. Usemonitor are blank.
the VIEW MODE button to choose another display mode
(P 18).
• The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera
properly (P 60).
No picture or sound• Input on the television is set to “TV”: Set input to “HDMI”
on TV.
(P 60).
• The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the television to adjust the volume (P 60).

Miscellaneous
Problem

Solution• Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert thebattery (P 40).

The camera is unresponsive.

• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 46).

• The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the connection.

• The controls are locked: Press and hold the MENU/OK button

Technical Notes

The camera does not
function as expected.
No sound.
Pressing the Q button
does not display thequick menu.

12364

to unlock the controls (P 15, 17).
Remove and reinsert the battery (P 40). If the problem
persists, contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer.
Adjust the volume (P 250).
TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 176).

Warning Messages and Displays
The following warnings appear in the display.
Warning

Description
Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-chargedi (red)spare battery.
Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a fulj (blinks red)ly-charged spare battery.
The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on ans (displayed in red withother subject at the same distance, then recompose thered focus frame)
picture.
The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be
Aperture or shutter
over- or under-exposed. Use the ﬂash for additional lightspeed displayed in red
ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject.
FOCUS ERROR
Camera malfunction. Turn the camera oﬀ, remove the lens,
LENS CONTROL ERROR and check for foreign matter between the lens and the
TURN OFF THE CAMERA camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera
AND TURN ON AGAIN on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has beenformatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory
card using D USER SETTING > FORMAT.
CARD NOT INITIALIZED • The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
Turn the camera oﬀ, remove the lens, and check for foreign matter between the lens and the camera body, then
LENS ERROR
replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem
persists, contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
Technical Notes

12365Warning

Description• The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: Format the card.

• The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card

CARD ERRORPROTECTED CARD
BUSYb MEMORY FULL

WRITE ERROR

FRAME NO. FULL
Technical Notes

12366

is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If themessage is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
The memory card is locked. Unlock the card.
The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera
to format the card.
The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded.
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more freespace.
• Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card orturn the camera oﬀ and then on again. If the message
persists, contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
• Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more freespace.
• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card.
• The memory card was removed while data were being recorded:
Do not remove the memory card during recording.
• The memory card write speed is slow: When recording movies, be sure the memory card write speed is fast enough.
The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame
number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card andselect RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP > FRAME NO..
Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, thenselect CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO..

Warning Messages and Displays

Warning

Description• The file is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The ﬁlecannot be viewed.

READ ERROR• The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected picPROTECTED FRAME
ture. Remove protection and try again.
The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera.
CAN NOT CROP
Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy
any additional pictures you wish to print to another memoDPOF FILE ERROR
ry card and create a second print order.
The picture cannot be printed using DPOF.
CAN NOT SET DPOFF CAN NOT SET DPOF Movies cannot be printed using DPOF.
The selected picture cannot be rotated.
CAN NOT ROTATEF CAN NOT ROTATE Movies cannot be rotated.
F CANNOT EXECUTE The selected operation is not supported: Check whether them CANNOT EXECUTE picture was recorded with a diﬀerent model of camera.

Technical Notes

12
367

Warning Messages and Displays

Warning
Description
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature alp (yellow)
CAMERA IS APPROACHING lowed when STANDARD is selected for AUTO POWER
OFF TEMP. and will shortly turn oﬀ automatically. Turn the
STANDARD
camera oﬀ and wait for it to cool.
TEMPERATURE LIMITThe camera is approaching the maximum temperatureallowed when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF
p (yellow)
TEMP. and will shortly turn oﬀ automatically. Remaining
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
in contact with the camera could result in low-temperature
HIGH TEMPERburns; mount the camera on a tripod or take other steps to
ATURE LIMIT.DO NOT
avoid prolonged contact with the camera. The camera will
HOLD CAMERA FOR
shortly turn oﬀ automatically. Turn the camera oﬀ and wait
LONG PERIODS OF TIME
for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when
this warning is displayed.
The camera temperature has reached the cutoﬀ point andp (red)the camera is about to turn oﬀ automatically. Turn the camHIGH TEMPERATURE
era oﬀ and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in picLIMIT REACHED
tures taken when this warning is displayed.
SHUTTING DOWNTechnical Notes

12368

Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the recording time or numberof pictures available at different image sizes. All figures areapproximate; file size varies with the scene recorded, producing wide variations in the number of files that can be
stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may
not diminish at an even rate.
Capacity

T

FINE
O 3∶2

RAW (UNCOMPRESSED)
PhotosRAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)
RAW (COMPRESSED)
Movies *SD/CFexpress memory cards
64 GB

V2160
W1080

NORMAL

4080

6040
1090
1990
2760
80 minutes
80 minutes* Assumes default bit rate.

O • The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with thesettings selected (P 68).

• Shots over an hour in length may be recorded across multiple files without

interruption. In addition, movies over 4 GB in size will be recorded uninterrupted across multiple files to SD memory cards with capacities 32 GB
or less.

Technical Notes

12
369

Specifications
SystemModel
Product Number
Effective pixels
Image sensor
Storage media
Memory card slots
File system

Image size

Technical Notes

12370

FUJIFILM X-H2S
FF210002
Approx. 26.16 million
23.5 mm × 15.6 mm (APS-C), X-Trans CMOS 5 HS sensor withprimary color ﬁlter
Fujiﬁlm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC and CFexpress Type B
memory cards• SD memory card slot (UHS-II compliant) ×1• CFexpress memory card slot (Type B) ×1• Still pictures: Compliant with DCF 2.0• Compressed: Exif 2.32 JPEG-baseline compliant; DPOF compliant; HEIF compliant (4 : 2 : 2, 10-bit)• Uncompressed or compressed using a reversible or non-reversible
algorithm: RAW (original RAF format; special-purpose software
required); RAW+JPEG available; TIFF (RGB)• Movies: Compliant with HEVC/H.265, H.264, and ProRes• Audio (including voice memos):- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)- AAC (MP4 recordings only)• Audio (via XLR microphone adapter):- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling; four channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)- AAC (MP4 recordings only; two channels: 16-bit, 48 kHz
sampling)
O 3∶2 (6240 × 4160)
O 1∶1 (4160 × 4160)
O 16∶9 (6240 × 3512)
P 3∶2 (4416 × 2944)
P 1∶1 (2944 × 2944)
P 16∶9 (4416 × 2488)
Q 3∶2 (3120 × 2080)
Q 1∶1 (2080 × 2080)
Q 16∶9 (3120 × 1760)
RAW (6240 × 4160)
TIFF (6240 × 4160)
O panorama: vertical (2160 × 9600)/horizontal (9600 × 1440)
P panorama: vertical (2160 × 6400)/horizontal (6400 × 1440)

Specifications

SystemLens mountSensitivity

Technical Notes

FUJIFILM X mount• Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to
ISO 160 – 12800 in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO 1–3; extended
output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 80, 100, 125, 25600, or
51200• Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 160–12800
in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 25600
Metering
256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;
MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED
Exposure control
Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;
aperture-priority AE; manual exposure
Exposure compensation • Still pictures: −5 EV – +5 EV in increments of ⁄ EV• Movies: −2 EV–+2 EV in increments of ⁄ EV
Shutter speed• MECHANICAL SHUTTER, E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER, E-FRONT +MECHANICAL⁃ Mode P: 4 s to ⁄ s⁃ Mode A: 30 s to ⁄ s⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
• ELECTRONIC SHUTTER⁃ Mode P: 4 s to ⁄ s⁃ Mode A: 30 s to ⁄ s⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s⁃ Bulb: Fixed at 1 s• MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC, E-FRONT + MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC⁃ Mode P: 4 s to ⁄ s⁃ Mode A: 30 s to ⁄ s⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.

12371

SystemContinuous
CONTINUOUS MODE
40fps(1.25X CROP) *30fps(1.25X CROP) *20fps(1.25X CROP) *15fps(1.25X CROP) *10fps(1.25X CROP) *40fps *
30fps *
20fps *
15fps
10fps
8.0fps
7.0fps
5.0fps
3.0fpsAvailable frame advance rates(JPEG)
40
30
20
15
10
40
30
20
15
10
8.0
7.0
5.0
3.0

* Available with electronic shutter only.

O The frame rate and number of frames per burst var-

ies with shooting conditions and type of memory
card used.

Focus• Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring
• Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/phase-detection AF)• Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL
White balanceTechnical Notes

Self-timer

12372

Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1,
Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sunlight, shade, daylight ﬂuorescent, warm white ﬂuorescent,cool white ﬂuorescent, incandescent, underwaterOﬀ, 2 sec., 10 sec.

Specifications

SystemFlash mode

• MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.),
MANUAL, MULTI, OFF• SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (highspeed sync)• RED EYE REMOVAL: L FLASH, OFF
Hot shoeTechnical Notes

Provided (supports TTL ﬂash control); supports sync speeds asfast as ¹⁄₂₅₀ s (mechanical shutter) or ¹⁄₁₂₅ s (electronic shutter)
Sync contact
X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as ½ s (mechanicalshutter) or ⁄ s (electronic shutter)
Sync terminal
ProvidedElectronic viewfinder 0.5-in., 5760k-dot OLED viewﬁnder; magniﬁcation 0.80× with
50 mm lens (35 mm format equivalent) at inﬁnity and diopter(EVF)
set to −1.0 m−1; diagonal angle of view approximately 40°(horizontal angle of view approximately 32°)
• Diopter adjustment: −5 to +3 m−1• Eyepoint: Approximately 24 mm
LCD monitor• Rear monitor: 3.0-in/7.6 cm, 1620k-dot color touch screen
LCD monitor, Vari-angle LCD monitor• Shoulder monitor: 1.28-in/3.25 cm, 128 × 128-dot memory
LCD monitor
Movies• Movie size: J 3:2, V 16∶9, d 17∶9, W 16∶9, W 17∶9(with stereo sound) • Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P• Recording/output format:- H.265 (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2/4 : 2 : 0; 720, 360, 200, 100, or 50
Mbps)- H.264 (8-bit MOV/MP4 4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50Mbps)- ProRes 422 HQ, ProRes 422, ProRes 422 LT (10-bit MOV
4 : 2 : 2)
- HDMI output supported (RAW output supported with
Atomos and Blackmagic Design external recorders; 8-bit
4 : 2 : 2/10-bit 4 : 2 : 2)12373

System
High-speed movies• Movie size: V 16∶9, d 17∶9, W 16∶9, W 17∶9
• Frame advance rate: 240P , 200P , 120P, 100P**

* W only.

Input/output terminals
Microphone connector ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jackHeadphone jack socket ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jackRemote release connector ⌀2.5 mm 3-pole mini jack
Digital input/output USB connector (Type-C) USB3.2 Gen2x1
HDMI output
HDMI connector (Type A)

Technical Notes

12
374

Specifications

Power supply/otherPower supply
NP-W235 rechargeable battery (supplied with camera)
Battery life
• Battery type: NP-W235• Lens: XF35mmF1.4 R• External flash units: Disabled• Shooting mode: Mode P
Number of shots
PERFORMANCELCD
EVF
Approx. 530
Approx. 390
BOOST 1NORMAL
Approx. 580
Approx. 550
ECONOMYApprox. 720
Approx. 610
Number of shots (VG-XH vertical battery grip)
PERFORMANCELCD
EVF
Approx. 1410
Approx. 1040
BOOST 1NORMAL
Approx. 1520
Approx. 1440
ECONOMYApprox. 1850
Approx. 1580
Total length of footage that can be recorded ona single charge
Continuancebattery life of
Actual battery life
movie captureModeof movie capture
Approx. 90 minutes
Approx. 120 minutes
J2
Approx. 70 minutes
Approx. 105 minutes
V3
Approx. 95 minutes
Approx. 165 minutes
W3
High-speed movies 4 Approx. 60 minutes–

CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera
and SD memory card.
Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level andthe ﬁgures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endurance will decline at low temperatures.

375

Technical Notes

1 EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) selected EVF/LCD
BOOST SETTING.
2 At a frame rate of 29.97 fps.
3 At a frame rate of 59.94 fps.
4 V at a frame rate of 120 fps.

12

Power supply/other
Camera size
136.3 mm × 92.9 mm × 84.6 mm (42.8 mm excluding projections,(W × H × D)measured at thinnest part)/5.37 in. × 3.66 in. × 3.33 in. (1.69 in.)Camera weight
Approx. 579 g/20.5 oz., excluding battery, accessories, andmemory card
Shooting weight
Approx. 660 g/23.3 oz., including battery and memory card
Operating conditions • Temperature: −10 °C to +40 °C/+14 °F to +104 °F (+5 °C to+40 °C/+41 °F to +104 °F when battery is charging)• Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation)

Technical Notes

Wireless transmitter
Wireless LAN
Standards
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol)
Operating frequency • Israel, Indonesia: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)(center frequency)• USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels): 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,745 MHz–5,825 MHz (UNII-3)• European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, Newzealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore,
Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain,
Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels): 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,500 MHz–5,700 MHz (W56)
Access protocols
Infrastructure
Bluetooth®
Standards
Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy)
Operating frequency 2,402 MHz–2,480 MHz(center frequency)

12376

Specifications

NP-W235 rechargeable battery
Nominal voltage
7.2 V
Nominal capacity
2350 mAh
Rating capacity
2200 mAh
Operating
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
temperature
38.92 mm × 22.8 mm × 52.26 mm/
Dimensions
1.5 in. × 0.9 in. × 2.1 in.
(W × H × D)
WeightApprox. 79 g/2.8 oz.
AC-5VJ AC power adapter
Manufacturer
Address

Model nameRated input
Input capacity
Rated output
Average active efficiency
Efficiency at load 10%
No-load power consumption
Operating temperature
WeightDongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd.
No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town,
523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province,
PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AC-5VJ
100 V – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Max. 50 VA
DC5.0V 3.0A 15.0W
84.8 %
84.2 %
0.02 W
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
Approx. 45 g ± 2 g/1.6 oz. ± 0.1 oz.

O Specifications and performance are subject to change without notice.
Fujifilm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
The appearance of the product may differ from that described in thismanual.

Technical Notes

12
377

MEMO

378

MEMO

379

7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPANhttps://fujifilm-x.com